xSpider manual

xSpider 2.8 REFERENCE MANUAL

Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB): Xpole FAZN, FAZ, AZ Motor Starters: Z-MS, PKZ Power Circiut Breakers: LZM, NZM, IZM Fuses: D, C, NH Miniature Switch Disconnectrors: ZP-A, IS Power Switch Disconnectrors: LN, N, PN, IN Calculations: Voltage drops Load distribution Impedance Short circuit current (3-ph fault) Short circuit current (1-ph fault) …

The xSpider software system is a graphically oriented design system for dimensioning of low-voltage networks fitted with protective devices of Eaton/Moeller brands.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________ xSpider Version 2.8, Reference Manual © Ing. Petr Slavata, Doc. Ing. Jiří Rez, CSc., Ing. Michal Kříž, Ing. František Štěpán, 2010 Exclusive rights: Eaton GmbH Scheydgasse 42, A-1215 Wien, Austria Technical assistance (Austria): Technical assistance (Germany): Eaton GmbH Scheydgasse 42, A-1215 Wien Austria Tel.: +43 (0) 5 08 68 - 0 e-mail: [email protected] http://xspider.moeller.net www.moeller.net

Eaton Electric GmbH Hein-Moeller-Str. 7-11, 53115 Bonn Germany Tel: +49 (02 28) 602 - 5600 e-mail: [email protected] http://xspider.moeller.net www.moeller.net

This documentation is an integral part of the xSpider (Spider) software system and may be distributed only in connection with this system. The authors provide the software system and its documentation on an „As-is“ basis without warranties of any kind and with the potential occurrence of faults. The authors shall be held liable for any deliberate, indirect, incidental or subsequent damage arising in connection with the use of these materials. This manual describes the status of the software system at the time upon completion of its development and does not concern any potential changes in the future. All registered trademarks or other trademarks used in this documentation are the property of their respective owners. No ownership rights arising therefrom are questioned by their reference in the documentation. Files: xSpider_mTI.DOC, xSpider_mOB.DOC, xSpider_m**.DOC, where ** means 00 - 09 xSpider_t**.DOC, where ** means 01 - 03

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

xSpider, Reference Manual I

CONTENTS _______________________________________________ xSpider_mOB.DOC

Contents .................................................................................................................................... I PART I: DIMENSIONING OF LOW-VOLTAGE NETWORKS THEORETICAL INTRODUCTION Prepared by: Ing. Michal Kříž, Doc. Ing. Jiří Rez, CSc., Ing. František Štěpán xSpider_m00.DOC

1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.1 Why is good to use computer for dimensioning conductors and designing of circuit protection? ......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 xSpider software - what is it intended for? .................................................................... 2 1.3 How to proceed when designing a low-voltage network ............................................... 3

2. Network Behavior in Operating State and under Overload .................................................... 4 2.1 Line current IB, nominal current of the protective device In .......................................... 4 2.2 Line dimensioning ......................................................................................................... 5 2.2.1 Heat generation in the conductor ....................................................................... 5 2.2.2 Steady conductor temperature - maximum temperatures allowed… ................ 6 2.2.3 Maximum currents allowed - what do they depend on ..................................... 6 2.2.4 Comments on entering values into the xSpider software .................................. 8 2.3 Determination and verification of protective devices .................................................... 8

3. Network Behavior at Short Circuits ...................................................................................... 15 3.1 Types of short-circuit faults ......................................................................................... 15 3.2 Short-circuit current flow ............................................................................................. 15 3.3 Network configuration ................................................................................................. 17 3.4 Short-circuit current calculation .................................................................................. 17 3.5 Calculation procedures ................................................................................................ 19 3.6 Line dimensioning from the short-circuit point of view .............................................. 20 3.7 Dimensioning of protective devices from the short-circuit point of view ................... 21

4. Voltage Drops, Load Distribution, Selectivity ..................................................................... 27 4.1 Allowed voltage drops ................................................................................................. 27 4.2 Comments on the voltage drop calculation .................................................................. 28 4.3 Load calculation for the particular network branches ................................................. 28 4.4 Coordination between protective devices .................................................................... 29 4.5 Cascading of protective devices .................................................................................. 31 4.6 Reactive power compensation ..................................................................................... 33

5. Properties of Protective Devices ........................................................................................... 36 5.1 Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 36 5.2 Circuit breakers ............................................................................................................ 37

6. Bibliographic Reference ....................................................................................................... 41 PART II: XSPIDER - PROGRAM OPERATION Prepared by: Ing. Petr Slavata xSpider_m01.DOC

7. Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 43

8. Installation ............................................................................................................................. 46 8.1 Installation from CD-ROM .......................................................................................... 46

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

II xSpider, Reference Manual

8.2 “Manual” customer installation in case of SETUP failure .......................................... 48 8.3 Installation backup ....................................................................................................... 49 8.4 Software update from website .................................................................................... 50 8.5 Software update from directory ................................................................................... 50

9. Launching xSpider ................................................................................................................ 51 9.1 First launching ............................................................................................................. 51 9.2 Second and any other launching .................................................................................. 52 xSpider_m02.DOC

10. Introduction to the xSpider system ..................................................................................... 54 10.1 Main screen and program operation .......................................................................... 54 10.2 Running program functions ....................................................................................... 56 10.3 Undo, Redo ................................................................................................................ 57 10.4 Method of program application ................................................................................. 57 xSpider_m03.DOC

11. Network wiring diagram (topology) ................................................................................... 60 11.1 Network type and voltage system .............................................................................. 61 11.2 Supply network .......................................................................................................... 62 11.3 Generator ................................................................................................................... 64 11.4 Transformer ................................................................................................................ 65 11.5 Switchboard trunk ...................................................................................................... 67 11.6 Line - enclosed busbar distribution system ................................................................ 69 11.7 Line - cable ................................................................................................................ 72 11.8 Switch-disconnector ................................................................................................... 77 11.9 Circuit breaker ........................................................................................................... 78 11.10 Fuse .......................................................................................................................... 81 11.11 Motor ....................................................................................................................... 83 11.12 Load ......................................................................................................................... 84 11.13 Compensation .......................................................................................................... 86 11.14 Group ....................................................................................................................... 87 11.15 Free graphics ............................................................................................................ 89 11.15.1 Line .............................................................................................................. 89 11.15.2 Rectangle ..................................................................................................... 89 11.15.3 Circle ........................................................................................................... 89 11.15.4 Text .............................................................................................................. 90 11.16 Drawing tools ........................................................................................................... 90 xSpider_m04.DOC

12. Editing the Network Wiring Diagram ................................................................................. 91 12.1 Properties editing ....................................................................................................... 91 12.1.1 Editing the properties of network components .............................................. 92 12.1.2 Editing the properties of free graphics components ...................................... 94 12.1.3 Batch properties editing - limit voltage drops and limit discon. time ........... 95 12.1.4 Batch properties editing - tags ...................................................................... 96 12.2 Changing component position ................................................................................... 97 12.3 Copying components ................................................................................................. 98 12.4 Modifying the component geometry - stretch ............................................................ 99 12.5 Erasing components ................................................................................................... 99 12.6 Using the clipboard .................................................................................................. 100 12.6.1 Cut objects to the clipboard ......................................................................... 100 12.6.2 Copy objects to the clipboard ...................................................................... 101 12.6.3 Paste objects from the clipboard ................................................................ 101 12.7 Searching item in wiring diagram according to tag ................................................. 101

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

xSpider, Reference Manual III

13. View control (Zoom) ........................................................................................................ 102 13.1 Regenerating images ................................................................................................ 102 13.2 Pan............................................................................................................................ 102 13.3 Zoom in / zoom out .................................................................................................. 103 13.4 Zooming in a part of the design (Zoom Window) ................................................... 104 13.5 Return to the previous image (Zoom Previous) ....................................................... 105 13.6 Viewing the drawing area image (Zoom All) .......................................................... 105 13.7 Hide calculation results ............................................................................................ 105 xSpider_m05.DOC

14. Network Parameter Calculations ...................................................................................... 106 14.1 Dimensioning of cables and protective devices ....................................................... 106 14.2 Network connection logic check .............................................................................. 109 14.3 Voltage drops and load distribution ......................................................................... 109 14.4 Short-circuit currents ............................................................................................... 114 14.4.1 Cascades ...................................................................................................... 119 14.4.2 Selectivity .................................................................................................... 124 14.5 Displaying impedances in network nodes ............................................................... 125 14.6 Displaying the values of limit voltage drops, discon. times and conn. phases ........ 127 14.7 Summary of variables related to the calculations .................................................... 129 xSpider_m06.DOC

15. Tripping Characteristics .................................................................................................... 133 15.1 Plotting the characteristics of circuit breakers from the database ........................... 134 15.2 Plotting the characteristics of fuses from the database ............................................ 136 15.3 Plotting the characteristics of cables from the database .......................................... 136 15.4 Plotting the characteristics of circuit breakers/fuses/cables taken over from the network project ........................................................................ 138 15.5 Editing the properties of an already plotted characteristic ...................................... 139 15.6 Erasing an already plotted characteristic from the chart ......................................... 140 15.7 Printing the sets of characteristics to printer ............................................................ 140 15.8 Working with files ................................................................................................... 141 15.8.1 Saving a set of characteristics to file ........................................................... 141 15.8.2 Loading (opening) files with the set of characteristics ............................... 142 15.8.3 Starting to create a new set of characteristics ............................................. 143 15.8.4 Exporting the sets of characteristics to BMP format ................................... 143 15.8.5 Exporting the sets of characteristics to DXF format ................................... 144 15.8.6 Terminating the work with the Tripping Characteristics module ............... 145 xSpider_m07.DOC

16. Component Databases ....................................................................................................... 146 16.1 Database operation - component selection .............................................................. 146 16.2 Database modifications by the user ......................................................................... 148 16.3 Structure of data tables for the individual component types ................................... 152 xSpider_m08.DOC

17. Information about Project, Title Block ............................................................................. 156

18. Printing the Results to Printer ........................................................................................... 157 18.1 Print preview ............................................................................................................ 157 18.2 Printing the results to printer ................................................................................... 159 18.3 Printing wiring diagrams ......................................................................................... 159 18.4 Page Setup ................................................................................................................ 163

19. Data Export ....................................................................................................................... 165 19.1 Exporting component lists ....................................................................................... 165 19.2 Exporting the network wiring diagram to BMP file format .................................... 166

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IV xSpider, Reference Manual

19.3 Exporting the network wiring diagram to DXF file format ..................................... 168 20. Working with Files ........................................................................................................... 169 20.1 Saving your project to a file on the disk .................................................................. 169 20.2 Loading (opening) files with projects ...................................................................... 170 20.2.1 Loading (opening) demo files ..................................................................... 170 20.3 Editing a new project ............................................................................................... 171 20.4 Ending the project editing operation ........................................................................ 171 20.5 Ending the program session ..................................................................................... 172 21. Options .............................................................................................................................. 173 21.1 Graphics environment .............................................................................................. 173 21.2 Wiring diagram ........................................................................................................ 175 21.3 Free graphics ............................................................................................................ 176 21.4 Calculation ............................................................................................................... 176 21.5 Automatic dimensioning .......................................................................................... 177 21.6 Changing the licence data ........................................................................................ 179

22. Help .. ................................................................................................................................ 180 22.1 Tip of the Day .......................................................................................................... 180

23. About xSpider ................................................................................................................... 181 xSpider_m09.DOC

24. History of Versions ........................................................................................................... 182 PART III: XSPIDER - SOLVED EXAMPLES Prepared by: Ing. Petr Slavata xSpider_t01.DOC

25. xSpider - Solved Examples ............................................................................................... 194 25.1 Wiring diagram - creation, editing ........................................................................... 194 xSpider_t02.DOC

25.2 Wiring diagram editing and basic calculations - radial network ............................. 106 xSpider_t03.DOC

25.3 Overview of demo examples provided with the program ........................................ 218 25.3.1 DEMO-RadialNetwork (radial network) ..................................................... 218 25.3.2 DEMO-MeshedNetwork (meshed network) ............................................... 219 25.3.3 DEMO-Simultaneous-and-Utilization-Factors ........................................... 220 25.3.4 DEMO-Busbar (busbar distribution) ........................................................... 221 25.3.5 DEMO-LoadLooping (load looping) .......................................................... 222 25.3.6 DEMO-Cascade (circuit-breaker/fuse cascading) ....................................... 223 25.3.7 DEMO-Network (radial network) ............................................................... 225 25.3.8 DEMO-Network-1F (radial network with 1-phase consumptions) ............. 226 25.3.9 DEMO-Sit-TN690 (meshed TN network 690/400 V)................................. 226 25.3.10 DEMO-Network-IT (radial IT network) ................................................... 227 25.3.11 DEMO-ParallelCables (parallel cables) .................................................... 227

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

xSpider, Reference Manual V

PART I: Dimensioning of Low-Voltage Networks - Theoretical Introduction

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VI xSpider, Reference Manual

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

xSpider, Reference manual 1

1. Introduction _______________________________________________ It is not easy to dimension and protect electrical equipment in a correct and at the same time optimum way. Because every time it is necessary to harmonize a number of requirements, lead in the first place by need to secure safety of the operated equipment in the best manner possible and simultaneously ensure the overall efficiency of its design. Both of these points of view are on principle contradictory. The aim is always the same - the equipment and the supply lines should never threaten its neighborhood, even under the most unfavorable operating or fault conditions. On the other hand, the financial affordability always forces us not to oversize the entire system and to keep it within reasonable costs and spatial requirements. Safety of electrical equipment is governed by electrical regulations. They specify that the equipment may not run excessively hot when being overloaded, the voltage drops on the supply side may not, under any operating conditions, exceed the maximum limit allowed, the protection through automatic disconnection from the power source must respond in sufficiently short time in case of fault etc. From the list specified above it may appear that the safety requirements will be met provided the equipment and the supply lines are dimensioned sufficiently. However, we should also not forget the fact that excessively high short-circuit currents may arise in case of fault and the equipment must comply, with all of its components, precisely to such possible short-circuit currents. Incorrect selection of any installation component can seriously threaten the safety of the equipment itself as well as the safety of the neighborhood. In addition to the necessary safety points of view, we should not forget the operating reliability aspect either. A fault caused by one part of the equipment may not lead to the entire facility being out of operation. Instead, the protective device should disconnect the respective failed part only. Even though the aspect of selective rating as described above is mentioned right in several standards, in practice this issue is, unfortunately, not given adequate attention most of the times. Various requirements, which are indicated here, can be met through the right selection of equipment, lines and protective devices. Nowadays there is a fairly wide range of these components available, but when selecting them, it is necessary to take into account that each type has slightly different characteristics and, thus, is suitable for a different purpose.

1.1 Why is good to use computer for dimensioning of conductors and designing of circuit protection?

First of all, the primary aim should not be to fully mechanize and automate the designer’s work with electrical equipment, circuits and installations. Designing cannot and may not be distorted simply to some series production of designs. Prior to starting to process a project itself at all, the designer must determine a number of figures, values and parameters. He/she must know what must be supplied with what power, under what conditions, what are all the situations that certain electrical equipment must withstand during operation etc. On the other hand, there is a range of routine and sometimes even quite tedious tasks included in or associated with designing. These tasks include both the correct dimensioning of line and the correct selection of the protective device when the line as well as the protective device must be verified from many different aspects. In some cases, the designer should repeat a number of operations several times to follow the correct procedure. For instance, if he/she receives an incorrect cross-section due to voltage drop, which is a verification that should be done as one of the very last checks, he/she should review the previous design verifications from all aspects once again.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2 xSpider, Reference manual

At the same time, everyone would probably admit that it is even needless to repeat all the steps many times. Whether this is the case or not must be decided by the designer alone again based on a proper consideration. However, if he/she uses a computer, many of these concerns and considerations are not present anymore because the computer processes these tasks alone. Therefore, it is good to use the computer also because we do not want to leave anything up to the coincidence, we do not want to omit certain steps because of their labor intensity as well as because we want to get a fast and accurate calculation result. However, the designer must know what the computer is doing in fact and why it is doing it. He must be aware of the fact that a computer can be a useful aid, however, all important decisions must be made by the designer himself/herself.

1.2 xSpider software - what is it intended for? The xSpider software is intended for the design of low-voltage installations and their protection in TN, TT and IT systems, the rated voltage of which can be selected from the range of typical voltages or entered manually for any different voltage up to 1,000 V. Work in TT and IT systems extends the software's range of application nearly to all cases required by the designers. The network configuration itself depends on where the power source is located and how the loads are distributed. According to these factors, the designer decides on what the network should look like, whether there should be just a single backbone line with branches leading to the individual electricity consumers or whether the network should be designed as a radial network with branching directly at the transformer or as a combination of both previous options, as the case may be. Another advantageous feature of the xSpider software is the possibility of designing circular and meshed networks. The program will allow a fast verification of the proposed network arrangement and optimization of various network configurations. When solving the issues of low-voltage network dimensioning with the aid of computer technology, we work with two types of components in general:

Inserted components, i.e. such components, the parameters of which are preset and cannot be configured within the program (power sources, transformers, loads, motors, compensation condensers),

User-defined components, i.e. such components, the parameters of which are subject to investigation and optimization (lines - cables, busbar systems; protective devices - circuit breakers, fuses).

The text below deals with the issues related to the dimensioning of user-defined components. The xSpider software allows working in the following basic modes:

Design mode, i.e. the parameters of the user-defined components, where required so by the user, will be automatically determined and set in such manner as to ensure compliance with the safety requirements; however, the proposed design solution must not be fully optimal;

Control mode, i.e. parameters of all components (user-defined as well as inserted) are set by the user based on his/her experience; the calculation is followed by a check of the criteria for safe operation of the network. The user will evaluate the results and may subsequently carry out some optimization adjustments to the design.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1.3 How to proceed when designing a low-voltage network The process of designing a low-voltage network in particular steps as described in the following chapters is only a recommended procedure and the designer can select the sequence of the individual steps according to his/her needs. Typically, he/she designs the distribution as a whole and then at a later point in time it is found out that something must be added yet. Whereas what has once been designed or already installed, cannot be changed anymore. As a matter of fact, it should be counted with the option of including additional electrical equipment during the facility’s service life according to the electrical regulations, and it is also quite common in the practice. Another situation, which is similar in principle, occurs when changing the power supply for a certain equipment part. Part of the equipment is disconnected in the emergency mode, for instance, and the remaining parts of the installation are supplied from a standby supply. In such case, the designer works with already preset line parameters and carries out only the appropriate checks and possible adjustments. Ideal case occurs when the entire electric distribution is designed at once, which is exactly the case described in the following text of this user manual.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2. Network Behavior in Operating State and under Overload _______________________________________________

2.1 Line current IB, nominal current of the protective device In First of all, the designer determines the highest current in the line to the known equipment of the consumption point (building, facility, workshop, plant), which must be supplied to this point in order to ensure standard expected operation of the electrical equipment. However, it is not a simple sum of the rated currents of all devices, but the maximum current required to supply all devices, which are expected to be possibly in simultaneous operation at the power usually used instead of the maximum power. When supplying devices of identical character, the sum of the rated currents is multiplied by the simultaneous factor and the utilization factor. (The simultaneous factor is a ratio of the power input of devices in operation to the power input of all devices; the utilization factor expresses the extent of use of the respective equipment in percentage rate). xSpider allows the user to enter both factors. The utilization factor is always taken into account; the simultaneous factor is taken into account in radial networks. In addition, xSpider also offers the possibility to trip the particular loads, thus allowing the user to simulate real situations in the operation of electrical devices and take into account mainly heavier loads. Here it is necessary to point out certain pitfalls present when assessing the used (actual) and installed power since a prudent procedure is required. For instance, when the user enters the currents of all powered loads, we will use the sum of these currents for calculations. This method, however, is incorrect. If someone entered one socket outlet as one load, he would obtain the design current of IB = 10×16 = 160 A for one socket circuit with ten sockets, which is false of course. In the real case, the user must therefore specify the limitation described above right into its task definition. Based on the information about the loads, the designer will obtain the highest current in the line, which is called the design current IB. For this current, the designer selects the rated current of the protective device In. Its value must always be higher than the design current IB. Thus, it must be true that:

IB In

whereas: IB ...... design current (current for which the circuit is designed) [A] In ...... nominal current of the protective device [A] The condition stipulated above results from the requirement to avoid switching off by the protective device at normal functioning of the equipment. At this moment, the designer will not meditate too much on other features of the protective device. He/she will only determine its rated size. Nowadays, the size is identical for both circuit breakers and fuses. It can be selected from the series of 2; 4; 6; 10; 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100; 125; 160; 200; 225; 250; 315; 400; 630 A etc. Only the rated values of 12 A or 35 A, as the case may be, of fuses and 13 A for circuit breakers are different.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2.2 Line dimensioning The magnitude of the design current IB and subsequently the magnitude of the rated current In for the protective device imply also the admissible current load Iz. The following condition must be met:

In Iz

whereas: In ..... nominal current of the protective device [A] Iz ...... admissible line current load (continuous current carrying capacity) [A] The condition stipulated above is based on the requirement that the line may not be overloaded under either an abnormal equipment operation or its overloading; otherwise the line must be disconnected from power supply. Therefore, the admissible current load must be higher than the nominal current of the protective device. At the same time it is required from the protective device not to switch off in case of overcurrents, which may occur on a short-term basis during the operation. This implies also the assignment of line characteristics (the maximum admissible load), protection and equipment (load required for equipment functioning) as shown in the picture below.

Similarly to the case of protection assigned to the design current, the idea of allocating the same or higher value for the conductor or cable rated current to the nominal current of the protective device suggests itself here. The IEC 60364 5-523 standard specifies in fact the terms of “rated current-carrying capacity - rated current“. So why cannot we simply take a conductor or a cable with the most favorable price for us, the rated current (admissible line current load Iz) of which is immediately next higher to the nominal current of the protective device In? The manufacturers even specify the rated currents of their cables and the rated values of a number of those are specified in the Annex to IEC 60364 5-523. The text below explains why it is not so simple.

2.2.1 Heat generation in the conductor Heat is generated when electric current passes through the conductor. Unless such generated heat was carried away to the ambient environment, the conductor would be heated up until melting down. Only then the passage of the current would be interrupted. After the passage of any current lower than the one leading to conductor melting down, the temperature settles down at a certain value at last. Nevertheless, the higher the conductor temperature, the more heat is transmitted by the

Magnitude of current I

Time/current characteristic of the maximum admissible load of the protected equipment (current carrying capacity of a conductor).

Time/current characteristic of the protective device.

Time/current characteristic of the minimum load required for proper function of the equipment.

t Passage time of I current I

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


conductor to its ambient environment (see the following picture). The heat generated by the current passage in the conductor is proportional to the conductor resistance and increases with the square of the current. In addition to that, it must be kept in mind that the conductor resistance increases with rising temperature, which leads to even higher heat output exceeding the value corresponding to its square (2.492 precisely).

2.2.2 Steady conductor temperature - maximum temperatures allowed: operating and overload temperature

When a steady temperature is reached, there is a balance between the heat generated in the conductor by the passing current and the heat transmitted by this conductor into its ambient environment. The more obstacles there are for the heat to be transmitted into the ambient environment (insulation, installation method, …), the less current is needed for its heating up to the steady temperature. The highest core temperature allowed is thus determined by the insulation used for cable sheathing. A slightly higher temperature of the conductor core is allowed for overloading and short circuit since these overcurrents are presumed to be interrupted by the protective device in a sufficiently short period of time. The maximum allowed temperatures for standard operation and overload situation are different for various insulation types. Different insulation materials are able to withstand different temperatures. For the common PVC insulation, the maximum temperature allowed is 70 °C during standard operation, 120 °C in case of overload and 160 °C in case of short circuit. For bare aluminium and copper conductor (Al, Cu), these temperatures are 80 °C, 180 °C and 300 °C, respectively.

2.2.3 Maximum currents allowed - what do they depend on The magnitude of the currents allowed is determined by the maximum temperature of the conductor on one hand, and by the ambient temperature of the environment, to which the heat is transmitted, on the other hand. The crucial factor is the difference between the maximum temperature allowed for the conductor (whether the operating or the overload temperature) and the ambient temperature. Therefore, the lines can be stressed more at lower ambient temperatures than at its basic temperature and, conversely, less stressed at higher ambient temperatures. Another important property, which has an influence on the conductor current load, is going to be shown in example. The rated current of a CY single-core cable with the cross-section of 0.35 mm2 is 10.5 A. We would expect the rated current of the same CY conductor having the cross-section of 35 mm2, i.e. a hundred times larger, to be also a hundred times higher, i.e. approximately 1,000 A. However, it is by far not the case. The rated current of a CY conductor with the cross-section of 35mm2 is only 181 A. Why only so little? The load can rise only up to such extent how the heat

Current carrying core of the conductor.

Conductor insulation

Distance, in which the ambienttemperature is not significantly increased due to the current influence

Power loss flowing from the conductor core to the ambient environment

Tempe-rature

rise

u

Distance from the cable center

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


transmission is increased from the conductor into the ambient environment. However, the heat transmitted to the ambient environment did not increase proportionately to the cross-section, but proportionately to the conductor surface. Thus, if we take into account the core cross-sections, the surface did not increase 100 times as the cross-section did, but only 10 times. This implies that the allowed current should be 105 A. The fact that the actual rated current is higher results from several other factors, which were not taken into account in our estimate (insulation thickness etc.). In this case we have shown that the better heat transmission of the conductor into its ambient environment, the higher possible load of the conductor. Therefore it is possible, in general, to apply a higher load per cross-section unit on conductors with small cross-section than on large-cross-section conductors. The load-carrying capacity decreases in a similar manner for bundled conductors. In simple words, the load-carrying capacity will not increase proportionately to the number of conductors in the bundle, but proportionately to the square root of this number. During the designing work, it must be constantly kept in mind that the current loads of lines cannot be generally compared to the rated current-carrying capacity - rated current. This is because the rated current-carrying capacity of a conductor or cable is determined by its manufacturer for nominal (standard) conditions, which include:

for installation in air (basic installation method) - the nominal air temperature (30 °C) and installation in horizontal position in still air,

for installation in ground - nominal ground temperature (20 °C) and the determined thermal resistance of ambient ground.

However, these nominal conditions are met only rarely in practice. The actual conditions usually differ from the nominal ones. In addition to the basic installation, conductors and cables can be (and typically are) designed for various other methods of installation and a recalculation must be carried out depending on the actual situation. The following basic methods of installation are distinguished according to IEC 60364 5-523:

A Insulated conductors or multi-core cables in conduit placed in a thermally insulated wall, or multi-core cables directly in a thermally insulated wall

B Insulated conductors or multi-core cables in conduit on a wooden wall

C Cable on a wall

D Cable either directly in the soil or in ducts in the ground

E Two-core or three-core cables in air

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


F Single-core cables grouped tightly in air

G Single-core cables in air, spaced, cable to cable

clearance equal at least to the cable diameter

The standard distinguishes also modifications of these methods of installation of cables. The difference between installation method A1 and A2 and between B1 and B2 lies in the fact that A1 and B1 concern insulated conductors or single-core cables in pipe, while A2 and B2 concern multi-core cables in pipe. The previously used installation methods H, J, K, L etc., which distinguished between perforated and unperforated cable trays, installation on hooks, ladders or racks, are now included under the E, F or G methods of installation. Besides that the ambient temperature does not always have to comply with values taken into account according to the standard. In most cases, the 30 °C ambient air temperature and 20 °C ambient ground temperature are usually sufficient. The ambient temperature typically ranges below these values. If, for instance, the ambient air temperature does not exceed e.g. 25 °C and you calculate with the temperature of 30 °C, it means you have a certain reserve in the line loading. At the same time, it is not presumed that anyone would apply a load the line depending on changes in the ambient temperatures (such as day - night, or summer - winter). The maximum ambient temperature is counted upon. Line load is calculated for these maximum temperatures, whereas small short-time temperature fluctuations are not taken into account. If the maximum temperatures differ from the specified temperatures in the long term, whether in the upward or downward direction, these different temperatures must be entered in the program. Line loading also depends on the grouping of conductors and cables. Several conductors in the bundle reduce the allowed load. Cables can be grouped together in different ways. Therefore, a number of various alternatives arise in connection with the installation possibilities. For practical reasons, the program allows you to solve only basic situations described in IEC and European standards. However, it is a very useful tool also in those cases which are not specifically stated in the standard, because it is possible to find a close alternative and, on its basis, estimate the situation we need to solve (see also Chap. 2.2.4).

2.2.4 Comments on entering values into the xSpider software The programs solves only situations described in IEC 60364 5-523. It is not anticipated, for instance, that lines with cross-section exceeding 120 mm2 would be placed in conduits and cable trunkings. Most of the time, however, it pays off to lay two or even more cables parallel for such high currents than just one cable with an enormous cross-section, which is allowed in xSpider. Cables with cross-section greater than 300 mm2 cannot be designed either. All other effects that are not described can be taken into account by means of the user coefficient, through which it is possible to reduce or increase the final cable current-carrying capacity in any way. The use of this coefficient is in the sole responsibility of the user.

2.3 Determination and verification of protective devices Both circuit breakers and fuses can be used to protect electric lines. At present, circuit breakers are used to protect line with small cross-section up to 10 mm2, namely circuit breakers with types B, C

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


or D line characteristics (see Chapter 5), as the case may be, due to the possibility of easy reconnection. Fuses are typically used at the line entry into a building. Circuit breakers as well as fuses are used for cross-sections of 16 mm2 and 25 mm2, and fuses with gG characteristics usually protect larger cross-section lines. Those circuit breakers can be used for high admissible currents, for which it is possible to set the nominal current as well as the release currents and disconnection times in the particular characteristic sections. In this manner it is possible to adjust the circuit breakers so that their characteristics correspond optimally to the characteristics of the protected line. At this point it is useful to mention the principle for correct assignment of the protective device to the line. As already mentioned above, the line should be loaded with its design current IB. The nominal current In of the protective device must be greater than or at least equal to the design current IB, i.e. IB In. Satisfaction of this inequality, however, is not yet a full guarantee for the correct assignment of the protective device to the line. Not even satisfaction of the condition In Iz can guarantee that. This is because the nominal current of the protective device, without knowing the tripping characteristics, does not tell us anything about its capability to protect the line properly. The current, which ensures that the protective device is disconnected, can be 20 percent higher than its nominal current, but it might as well (in case of older types of circuit breakers) be 80 percent higher. In the former case, it is quite certain that the line will not be heated over the admissible overload temperature while in the latter case, this inadmissible line heating will occur for sure one day (cables with PVC insulation can be heated up to 200 °C). The damage to the insulation is then so strong that - if no other severe consequences occur (such as fire) - the line must be replaced together with the wiring components (boxes, terminals etc.).

0.00051

B C D

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

xIn

15 20 30 40 50

0.001

0.002

0.005

0.01

0.02

0.05

0.1

0.2

0.5

1

2

5

10

30

60

120

300

600

1200

3600

7200

1.13 1.45

t [s]

_________________________________ 1) These circuit breakers, sometimes also called miniature circuit breakers (MCB, according to EN 60 898, see Chap. 5.2) or installation circuit breakers, are equipped with identical thermal release which causes disconnection of small overcurrents in case of overload. They differ in setting of the instantaneous (short-circuit, electromagnetic) release, which ensures disconnection of high overcurrents - short circuits. This release operates only forcurrents above a certain size. For circuit breakers with characteristics: - type B - for currents exceeding the nominal current more than 3 to 5 times, - type C - for currents exceeding the nominal current more than 5 to 10 times, - type D - for currents exceeding the nominal current more than 10 to 20 times.

Tripping characteristics of gG fuses with indication of tolerance fields

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers; B, C, D type 1)

Int = 1.13 In

It = 1.45 In o = 30°C

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Apart from this information as to whether the protective device disconnects at all, we also need to know when it actually disconnects. There is a maximum admissible operating temperature and a maximum admissible overload temperature for every conductor. However, the protective device must disconnect the overcurrent in advance in order to prevent the conductor from reaching such temperature. xSpider allows you to check whether this is achieved. This is indeed also apparent from the following figures. The first figure shows the line heating characteristics (i.e. the time-temperature dependencies) at the overcurrents of 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7 and 1.8 fold of the rated current. The times, during which the disconnection should occur under the respective overcurrent values without exceeding the temperature of 100 °C under overload, were deducted from these characteristics. The dependency of these times on the cable current (indicated in multiples of its rated current) is plotted below (on the second figure). Under the specified currents, the protective device should disconnect no later than within these periods of time.

Line heating characteristics

0

50

100

150

200

250

0,1

0,3

0,5

0,7

0,9

1,1

1,3

1,5

1,7

1,9

2,1

2,3

2,5

2,7

2,9

time in relation to the time heating temperature of the cable

tem

per

atu

re in

°C 1,4

1,5

1,6

1,7

1,8

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers for high currents allowing the releases to be adjusted (see Moeller catalogue for "Power circuit breakers" line characteristics).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Required characteristics

0

0,2

0,4

0,6

0,8

1

1,2

1,4

1,6

1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8

Multiple of the nominal current

Dis

con

nec

tio

n t

ime

(rel

atio

n t

o t

he

tim

eh

eati

ng

co

nst

ant)

1

Some examples of graphical outputs from xSpider (module of Tripping Characteristics) follow: The thin line in the time - current characteristics indicates the threshold, at which the conductor core or cable core will be heated to the admissible overload temperature. A point having the coordinates of 40 A and 715 s is marked in the first one of those figures. What meaning does this point have? It simply means that if a current of 40 A flows through the conductor or cable for the period of 715 seconds, its core is heated to the admissible overload temperature. The same applies for the current of 60 A in the second figure. This current may flow through the given cable for the period of 715 seconds before its core is heated to the operating temperature. In this manner, every point of the thin curve determines the overcurrent and the period required for the core to reach the maximum overload temperature allowed at this overcurrent. How can we then verify if the correct protection has been assigned to the respective conductor or cable? Simply from the condition that - for any overcurrent - the protective device must disconnect before the limit overload temperature is reached. This means that every point of the circuit breaker characteristics - represented as the thick line in the graphs - must lie under the thin curve. This requirement is met in the case illustrated on the second one of the provided figures. For the overcurrent of 60 A, for instance, disconnection will occur approximately after 150 s, while the conductor core reaches the maximum temperature allowed not sooner than after 715 s. You can see that the condition is amply met in this case. That is, however, not the case in the situation shown on the previous figure. Both curves intersect there. In this figure you can see that the admissible overload temperature is reached within 715 seconds at the overcurrent of 40 A. The circuit breaker characteristic shows very obviously that the circuit breaker disconnects no sooner than after approximately 10,000 s, if it disconnects at all because the ordinate (a line perpendicular to the current axis) only touches the circuit breaker characteristic at this point for 40 A.

Course of the ideal line characteristics (relative values used for general representation).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Cable overload protection is not secured for these currents (the cable will be overheated before the circuit breaker disconnection).

Time/current characteristics of the cable.

Tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker.

Cable overload protection IS ensured for all currents (the circuit breaker will disconnect before the cable can be overheated).

Time/current characteristics of the cable.

Tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Some people could possibly object that the procedure described above is more complicated than the one indicated in the technical standard, namely in IEC 60364-4-43. This standard provides that the current load allowed for a protected line must be 1.45 times higher than the current that secures effective operation of the protective device within the agreed time. The standard does not explain further what is to be understood under this agreed time. However, we can state here for our purposes that as far as the miniature circuit breakers are concerned, this time means either one hour for lower nominal currents (up to 63 A) or two hours for higher nominal currents. Within this period of time (i.e. within one hour or within two hours), the miniature circuit breakers must disconnect the multiple of 1.45 of their nominal current. Consequently, the assignment itself of these miniature circuit breakers to lines is very easy. The allowed load of the line must be higher than the nominal current of the circuit breakers. In case of fuses, this assignment is less unambiguous. For common fuse cartridges, the blowing current within the agreed time (typically one hour, but also 2, 3 and 4 hours) corresponds to the multiple of 1.6 of its nominal current. The assignment of a line (its cross-section) to the nominal current of the fuse is then carried out in such a manner that the current-carrying capacity (current load allowed) of the line must be higher than approximately 110 % of the fuse cartridge nominal current (1.6/1.45 = 1.103). In a mathematical expression:

I2 1.45 Iz whereas: I2 ..... current ensuring effective operation of the protective device within the agreed period of time [A] Iz ..... current load allowed for the protected line [A]

The following applies for miniature circuit breakers:

I2 = 1.45 In

whereas: In ..... nominal current of the circuit breakers [A], then:

1.45 In 1.45 Iz

this implies that In Iz and, thus, that the allowed cable load must be HIGHER than the nominal current of the circuit breakers.

The following applies for fuses: I2 = 1.6 In

whereas: In ..... fuse nominal current [A], then:

1.6 In 1.45 Iz

this implies that 1.1 In Iz and, thus, that the allowed cable load must be HIGHER than 110% of the fuse nominal current.

Coordination between protective devices and cables is always checked according to formulas described above in xSpider software. It applies only to a certain, though the largest group of cases that come into consideration. But the standard IEC is based on some simplifications. The first of them is the anticipated ambient temperature, at which the line is loaded with its maximum operating current; the second one is the maximum allowed insulation temperature at overload, and the third one is the anticipated course of line heating that should correspond approximately to the characteristic of the protective device (see the previous figures). Therefore, the standard itself states that the protection pursuant to the standard does not ensure perfect protection under all

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


circumstances and does not have to be the most cost-efficient one in every case. Although the protection pursuant to the xSpider software system does not provide absolutely accurate results either, its final assignment of protective devices (checked by comparing cable heating characteristic and protective device tripping characteristic) is not only more accurate, but it also allows you to assign the protective devices for significantly different initial conditions than those considered in the standard (different ambient temperatures, different maximum insulation temperature allowed). Software xSpider from version 2.5 enables to switch off procedure of comparing cable heating characteristic and protective device tripping characteristic and to consider obligatory terms from IEC 60364-4-43 only.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3. Network Behavior at Short Circuits _______________________________________________

3.1 Types of short-circuit faults

If two conductors with different voltage are connected, we call it short circuit. Therefore, a network short circuit means a transient electromagnetic process, which is caused by a sudden decrease in impedance between phase conductors, or between the phase and the neutral or the protective conductor, as the case may be. The faulty conductive connection can be caused by improper handling, mechanical damage to the insulation, damage to the cable during earth work etc., its natural deterioration e.g. due to humidity, or it can be the result of increased stress to which it is exposed during switching processes. A short circuit causing a decrease of impedance leads immediately to an increase of the current to multiple of the usual operating current, the value of which depends on voltage and impedance. The values of the short-circuit current range within thousands and tens of thousands of amperes and its dynamic (power) and thermal impacts jeopardize all wiring components and components in the electrification network, through which it flows. Depending on the mode of loading of particular conductors of the three-phase system at short circuits (or its supply, as the case may be), we distinguish between symmetric or balanced short circuits (three-phase, or three-phase short circuit to earth), and asymmetric short circuits (two-phase, two-phase short circuit to earth, single-phase), as indicated in the figures.

The 3-phase symmetric short circuit leading to the highest short-circuit current is of a great importance from the point of view of electric network dimensioning according to IEC. The 1-phase short circuit to earth is the opposite example. It has large impedance in the fault current loop where the fault disconnection time can be considerably long due to the small short-circuit current and dangerous voltage is found on the exposed conductive parts throughout this time.

3.2 Short-circuit current flow

A sudden impedance change in the event of a short circuit leads to a transient process. Due to the high current, the balance between the magnetic and the electric field is disrupted in the electrification system area and the system comes to a new balanced state through transient current and voltage components. The short-circuit waveform depends on the moment when the short-circuit fault occurs. This flow curve can show a certain asymmetry in relation to the time axis with the presence of direct-current component. The short-circuit current is shown in the following figure.

1-phase short circuit to earth

2-phase short circuit to earth

2-phase symmetric short circuit

3-phase symmetric short circuit

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The following characteristic values marked with the symbols below are used with short-circuit current for dimensioning of electrical equipment and settings of protective devices.

Ik’’ Initial impulse short-circuit current: i.e. the r.m.s. value of symmetrical short-circuit

current without the direct-current component at the time of the short-circuit formation.

Ikm (ip)

Peak short-circuit current: i.e. the first amplitude (peak value) of the asymmetric short-circuit current with the direct-current component. It is the crucial criterion monitored when checking the dynamic stress of network equipment. Note: the ip symbol (taken over from IEC) is also used in later regulations for Ikm.

Itr Tripping short-circuit current (symmetrical) and its direct-current component ia tr. It is applied as a criterion to check the dimensioning of circuit breakers.

Ike Thermal equivalent short-circuit current: i.e. the r.m.s. value equivalent or imaginary symmetric (balanced) short-circuit current value, which results in the same heat effects after the tk period of the short-circuit duration as the actual asymmetric short-circuit current with the direct-current component. It serves as a criterion to assess the thermal load of the electrification network equipment.

Ik Steady-state short-circuit current i.e. the effective (symmetric) short-circuit current value after all the transient components disappear. With electrically remote short-circuits (the majority of cases in practice), it equals to the initial impulse short-circuit current Ik

’’. With electrically near short circuits, i.e. in circuits near the power supplies with large synchronous generators, it applies that Ik < Ik

’’ due to the increasing internal reactance of the synchronous machine throughout the short-circuit duration.

Short-circuit current waveform: Ik – effective short-circuit current value, ik – instantaneous short-circuit current value, iss (ia) – direct-current component of the short-

circuit current, Ikm – surge short-circuit current.

(ia)

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3.3 Network configuration In practice we encounter various network configurations, which place various demands on the computational methods. In general we distinguish between the following network types:

Whereas more simple computational methods and computational means (such as nomograms) are sufficient for the networks supplied from one side or for radial networks, we must use a computer to solve the meshed network efficiently. The advantage of xSpider consists in the possibility to perform calculations in the meshed networks with general (virtually arbitrary) definition of power supplies, lines and loads.

3.4 Short-circuit current calculation The calculation of conditions prevailing at short circuits in three-phase systems are regulated by the standard IEC 60909. The calculation can be done with relative (percentage) impedance values or with the actual values. The calculation using the actual impedance values proceeds as follows:

1. At first you depict the network, in which the short-circuit conditions are to be determined, through the so-called initial diagram showing all operating states.

2. Mark the locations, in which the short-circuit conditions are to be calculated. 3. Determine (calculate) the impedances for the individual system components. Then relate the

impedances of the individual system components to the reference voltage, typically corresponding to the rated voltage at the short-circuit point. A uniform reference voltage is selected for the entire system.

4. The positive-phase sequence impedance must be determined in order to be able to calculate the symmetric (three-phase) short circuits. In order to calculate the asymmetric (two-phase, single phase) short circuits you also need to know the negative-phase sequence impedance and the zero-phase sequence impedance for the electrification system components.

5. Set up a substitution diagram for the positive-phase, negative-phase and zero-phase sequence systems.

Line with supply from one side

Radial network Meshed network (with a higher number of nodes)

Radial network

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Determine the final short-circuit impedance in the given short-circuit point - by the application of computational methods for more simple network configurations through gradual simplification, and by means of a computer in case of more complex network with a higher number of nodes.

7. Calculate the short-circuit current, being the current of the equivalent voltage supply and short-circuit impedance.

For users who are interested to know more details about the computational methods applied in the xSpider software algorithms, we specify the following relations: Design (calculation) impedance for the:

supply part (hatched rectangle): QtQtQt jXRZ is calculated from the short-circuit power at the supply node

Transformer: TTT jXRZ is calculated from the short-circuit voltage and from the transformer short-circuit losses

Cable line: LLL jXRZ is calculated from catalogue values for cable resistance and inductance

Short-circuit impedance: kkk jXRZ whereas: LTQtk RRRR

LTQtk XXXX

The design impedances are of a complex nature (they include both real and imaginary component) and we apply the same calculation rules for them as for complex numbers.

Absolute value of short-circuit impedance: 22kkk XRZ

Initial impulse short-circuit current under a three-phase short circuit: k

nk

Z

UcI

3

.''

whereas 3

. nUc is the phase voltage of the equivalent power supply; c is the voltage coefficient

determined according to IEC 60909 (its value depends on the voltage of the applied LV, HV or EHV systems). In case of 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits, the situation is rather more complicated because you must calculate the positive-phase sequence Z(1), negative-phase sequence Z(2) and zero-phase sequence Z(0) impedance.

Fault point F

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


In practice it applies that Z(1) = Z(2) and, therefore, the initial impulse short-circuit current under a 1-phase short circuit (relevant for calculation of the fault disconnection time from source) is then defined by the relation:

Ic U

Z Zk

n''

( ) ( )

3

2 1 0

The fault loop impedance (for the needs of IEC 60364-4-41) can be determined as follows:

Zsv = (2 Z(1) + Z(0)) / 3 Since xSpider calculates the fault disconnection time from source directly, the user does not have to deal with the impedance calculation. The calculated impedances Z(0), Z(1) a Zsv can be displayed either as absolute values or as complex numbers. Note: Inspection technicians often require the Zs impedance (or the Zsv impedance according to IEC 60364-4-41, as the case may be) to be shown in the form of a single number. In spite of a certain inconsistency in the interpretation of measurements obtained by means of inspection measuring devices, it is possible to compare such results with the calculated Zsv values obtained from xSpider (typically, the inspection measuring devices do not measure impedance, but the active loop resistance - see Rschl, which is an acceptable simplification with respect to the measurement error).

3.5 Calculation procedures xSpider was developed for calculations of concerning generally defined networks, including complexly configured power networks with high number of nodes. The network can be analyzed under normal operating states as well as under short-circuit faults. The calculation is solved by matrix methods, i.e. by creating an admittance matrix for the drawn network configuration and inverting it to the impedance matrix. The impedances obtained in this manner are then used in the computational methods specified in IEC 60909 to determine the characteristic values of short-circuit currents, i.e. the initial impulse current Ik

’’, the surge short-circuit current Ikm (ip), the breaking current Itr and the equivalent heating current Ike. The short-circuit current flow is displayed as calculated by the differential equation method. Throughout the calculations, you still work with the fully designed power network diagram, in which you can - at any moment during the calculations - build various network configuration modes in the graphical form, such as changes in the power sources and loads by connecting or disconnecting certain branches etc.

Definition of the zero-phase sequence component of short-

circuit impedance: Z(0) = U(0) / I(0)

Definition of the negative-phase sequence component of short-


Definition of the positive-phase sequence component of short-


_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3.6 Line dimensioning from the short-circuit point of view Lines (conductors and cables) as well as devices included in the circuit must withstand the maximum short-circuit current, which may occur in the lines. This is the current developed due to a short circuit in the beginning of the line, which was not loaded before and, therefore, its minimum electric resistance should be taken into account. Both the lines as well as the devices must be checked for these maximum possible short-circuit currents, which vary depending on the place within the network where you calculate them. In addition, it must be verified whether the protective devices are capable of operating even at the smallest short-circuit currents arising in the circuit. Here you should realize that:

the function of the protective devices is activated by the short-circuit current and if the short circuit-current is too small, it will not cause the protective device to release, and

these “small“ short-circuit currents can - in case of its longer duration - also cause a damage to the devices, conductors, cables and electrical equipment integrated in the short-circuited circuit.

The lines are checked in view of the maximum short-circuit currents. The value of the short-time withstand current for the period of 0.1 s, i.e. Icw(0,1 s), is specified for every cable in the xSpider database. It represents the size of the short-circuit current, which can pass through the cable for the period of 0.1 s without causing the cable to heat to a temperature higher than the maximum allowed temperature at short circuit. And why is this value indicated for the short-circuit duration of 0.1 s? Because this is the longest period specified in the product regulations for circuit breakers (such as EN 60 947-2), during which the circuit breakers must disconnect any short circuits and, thus, it is longest period possible for the passage of the anticipated short-circuit current through the cable. However, the short-circuit duration periods are usually shorter. Common circuit breakers disconnect the short circuit significantly earlier than in 0.1 s (the miniature circuit breakers within the order of few milliseconds, the power circuit breakers within tens of milliseconds). The aforesaid variable is derived from the assumption that all heat developed due to the passage of the short-circuit current is also absorbed by the given conductor, which is then warmed up. This assumption is justified because no substantial heat transfer into the ambient environment can occur during such short period of short-circuit current passage. But in any case, the error arising due to negligence of the heat transfer into the environment lies on part of safety. Therefore, the actual current could be even slightly higher than the current calculated based on the aforesaid assumption. The program recalculates the actual short-circuit current Ik

’’ (initial) to the equivalent heating current flowing through the conductor for 0.1 s with Ike(0.1s). This is the current, which would pass through the conductor for the period of 0.1 s and would have identical effects as the real short-circuit current passing through the conductor for the period of Ttr (from the beginning of the short circuit until disconnection). This current is compared with Icw(0,1s) and must be lower than Icw(0,1s), i.e. Ike(0.1s) Icw(0,1s). The important aspect is that the Icw value for the time of 0.1 s can be easily calculated from the conductor material and cross-section. Note: The sub-clause 434.3.2 of IEC 60364-4-43 implies the relation: I2 × t = k2 × S2, whereas I is the effective short-circuit current value (i.e. Ik), S is the cable core cross-section in [mm2] and k is the constant dependant on the conductor material and its insulation. If you substitute the value of 0.1 s for the t time in this relation, you obtain Icw(0,1 s). Consequently, this implies the inequality: Ik

2 × Ttr Icw2 × 0.1.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3.7 Dimensioning of protective devices from the short-circuit point of view In this field, verification is required from the point of view of the maximum short-circuit currents on one hand, i.e. whether the protective devices are able to withstand them, and also from the point of view of the minimum short-circuit currents on the other hand, i.e. whether these devices disconnect them. More detailed information about the devices are provided in chapter “Properties of protective devices“ (Part I. Chap. 5). Verification in view of the maximum short-circuit currents Devices, which are included in the circuit where the short circuit occurred, must be able to withstand this short circuit. As for circuit breakers, it is important on one hand that they respond to the short-circuit current, and on the other hand it is also essential for them to be able to disconnect this short circuit. Therefore, the devices are checked for the passage of the short-circuit current. One parameter is indicated for MCBs (miniature circuit breakers) - the nominal breaking capacity Icn; two breaking capacities are indicated for power circuit breakers, namely the nominal limit breaking capacity Icu and the nominal operating breaking capacity Ics. It is guaranteed that the circuit breaker will withstand the Icu current passage and that it will also disconnect However, afterwards it is not guaranteed anymore that the circuit breaker meets all requirements as it should. In other words - it is not guaranteed anymore that it will disconnect such current the second time. As far as the Ics current is concerned, it is guaranteed that the circuit breaker will not only disconnect the current equivalent to Ics, but it will also remain functional in the future and meet the appropriate parameters even after this disconnection. Therefore, it is not necessary to replace it after the short circuit. The tripping short-circuit current Itr, i.e. the short-circuit current at the moment of disconnection, which comprises both its alternating-current component Ik and its direct-current component Ia (Iss), is compared with the circuit breaker values Icu and Ics or with the fuse value Icn (its nominal breaking capacity). The short-circuit current Itr must be lower than Icu. But if it is essential that the circuit breaker remains functional even after the short circuit, the short-circuit current Itr must be lower than Ics. Verification in view of the minimum short-circuit currents - protection against indirect contact (fault protection) One of the most frequently used methods of protection against indirect contact with exposed conductive parts (or - more correctly – fault protection) is the protection by automatic disconnection of supply. In case of a fault (insulation breakdown between the live and the exposed conductive part), the disconnection of the fault is effected by a suitable protective device. xSpider allows solving the protection by automatic disconnection in all typical low-voltage alternating current networks i.e. in TN, TT and IT systems. Conditions for protection in TN, TT and IT systems are specified in IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007) - Protection against electric shock, and we will mention only the most important information here because these facts are generally known.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


TN systems are the most frequently used in Europe, therefore we will describe their properties in more detail. The automatic disconnection principle in TN systems consists in the short-circuit current arising due to an insulation fault, causing the protective device to respond and, thus, to disconnect the failed circuit. To make the functioning of this principle possible, the accessible conductive parts are connected to the earth and to the neutral of the supply by means of a PE, i.e. protective conductor (see the figure). If the protection is to work and the disconnection is to occur in sufficiently short period of time, the fault current must be higher than the minimum operating current of the protective device. But what does it mean “in sufficiently short period of time”? It is the maximum time, during which a person can safely touch an exposed conductive part, which is live during the given fault. It was determined that the maximum voltage on exposed conductive parts is 90V during a fault in correctly earthed TN systems with 230V phase voltage, and that humans are able to withstand such voltage without any harm for the period of 0.45s. Therefore, the maximum disconnection time of 0.4s is prescribed for socket outlet circuits. For circuits supplying larger and fixed equipment with no risk that a person could hold them in their hand, a disconnection time of up to 5s is allowed. The permanent touch voltage UL for common areas is 50V. In extra dangerous areas and in specifically defined cases (such as in medical locations), the UL value can be reduced – e.g. to 25V. Sensitive residual-current devices with In 30 mA are used for disconnection in such situations. The fault current (i.e. the minimum short-circuit current) in a circuit comprising a power supply, phase conductor to the fault point and protective conductor from the fault point to the power supply (in the so-called fault current loop) must be higher than the minimum short-circuit current (in IEC 60364-4-41 referred to as Ia) that ensures the proper function of the protective device within the prescribed period of time. This implies the known condition for fault-current loop impedance Zs:

Zs Uo/Ia whereas: Zs ......... fault-current loop impedance [] Uo ........ phase voltage [V] Ia ......... current for the operation of the protective device within the prescribed period

of time [A] The prescribed disconnection times in TN systems are longer than those in TT systems, where conventional protective devices (circuit breakers or fuses) are used to disconnect. For Uo = 230V, it is 0.4s in case of terminal circuits up to 32A inclusive and 5s in case of distribution circuits and circuits above 32A. The conditions for automatic disconnection and the minimum short-circuit current in real installations imply that, on one hand, impedance is considered at the operating temperatures (i.e. higher than the cold state) and, on the other hand, the short-circuit current leads to a decrease in the phase voltage. These conditions (as defined in IEC 60364-4-41 with the formula for the Zs loop

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


impedance calculated or measured at the temperature of 20°C, adjusted to take into account the expected temperature rise in the conductors due to a fault:

a

os I

UZ

3

2

are included in the program so that when you substitute the appropriate data, the result truly indicates whether the circuit complies even under the most unfavourable fault conditions. Since the program calculates the disconnection time directly, it is not necessary to deal with the impedance calculation (for more details see also Part I Chap. 3.4, Part II Chap. 14.5). The figures show that the point determined by the coordinates of the calculated short-circuit current and the prescribed disconnection times must lie – in relation to the fuse or the circuit breaker characteristics – to the right of the right boundary line for the tripping characteristics (or above this characteristic, as the case may be).

A TT system is characterized by line conductors (L1, L2, L3, N) being led from the earthed power supply to the appliance (load), but the protection against indirect contact is ensured by connecting the exposed conductive parts of appliance to the installation earth electrode. If a fault earth current occurs (short-circuit between the phase and the appliance’s frame), the fault current IF flows through the ground to the power source and its strength is determined by the high earth resistance of the load (RA) and of the earthed power supply (RB). Touch voltage is present on the exposed conductive parts throughout the duration of the fault, i.e. until the moment of disconnection, but it – in case of a longer duration – may not exceed the permanent touch voltage value UL (50, 25 V).

Current Current Im Ip

A

B A

B

Ip

t1

t0

t1

t0

Time Circuit breaker Fuse

Time

Reliable disconnection zone

Reliable disconnection zone

Protection with fuses Protection with circuit breakers

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


This requirement implies the condition for ensuring such protection, if the device responsible for the automatic disconnection in a TT system is a residual-current device. At present, residual-current devices are practically the only devices that are able to disconnect the fault – insulation breakdown to the exposed conductive part – in powerful installations in TT systems. Accordingly, if a residual-current device is used in a TT system for automatic disconnection, the following condition must be met for the earth resistance of the load:

RA UL /In whereas: RA ........ earthing resistance of the protected load’s earth electrode [], UL ........ permanent touch voltage limit of 50 V, In ....... rated residual current of the residual-current device [A]. In order to achieve disconnection within a sufficiently short period of time, it is required that a significantly higher current is taken into account in the above-specified condition instead of In. The value of 5 In is indicated as a typical value, so that the earthing resistance of the load should certainly meet the condition of RA UL / (5In) when calculating with this safety increase. In some situations, particularly in case of small equipment with small consumption currents, it is possible to continue using the conventional protective devices, i.e. fuses or circuit breakers. Fuses and circuit breakers are subject to a different condition that residual-current devices. Similarly to the condition for automatic disconnection in a TN system, this condition is based on the concept of a current loop, which is closed by the fault current when a fault occurs (short-circuit between the phase and the appliance’s frame). This fault current must be disconnected in time so that the voltage at the exposed conductive parts upon fault, which can be as high as the phase voltage in the TT system, is disconnected in time. This condition can be formulated in a similar manner as the known condition for automatic disconnection in TN systems:

Zs Uo/Ia whereas: Zs ......... fault-current loop impedance [] Uo ........ phase voltage [V] Ia ......... current for the operation of the protective device within the prescribed period of time [A] Apart from the power supply, the conductor up to the fault point, the protective conductor to the exposed conductive parts and the earthing lead, the fault current loop includes particularly the earth conductor for the electrical installation and the supply earth conductor. In a simplified calculation, it is sufficient to take into account the resistance of these earth connections, with a certain reserve. However, the operating current of the protective device in a TT system, is in principle not the same as the operating current in a TN system. In view of the fact that a fault at the exposed conductive parts results in a higher touch voltage than a fault in a TN system, the disconnection times prescribed for a TT system are shorter than those for a TN system. For Uo = 230V, it is 0.2s in case of terminal circuits up to 32 A inclusive and 1s in case of distribution circuits and circuits above 32A. Unlike with the TN systems, on the other hand, the increase in the loop impedance due to the temperature increase in the wires (occurring in TN systems) is not taken into account here because the electrical resistance of the wires accounts only for a fundamentally negligible part of the resistance in the loop impedance.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


IT systems are used in situations where the maximum safety for the operator and high reliability in power supply are required even in case of a fault, which would lead to the release of the protective device in earthed TN and TT systems. Protection of exposed conductive parts is – similarly to TT systems – protected by connecting the exposed conductive parts of the loads to the earth. A typical feature of an IT system is that the protective device is not released at the moment of the fault (first fault) to earth because the fault current is limited only to leakage and capacity currents of the installation. Under these circumstances, the system with the first fault can be seen as a TN or TT system (depending on the extent and design of the earthing of the loads – whether the exposed conductive parts of all appliances in the system are connected to a common protective conductor, or whether they are connected to earth in groups or individually per appliance). If the exposed conductive parts are properly connected to earth, no danger of electrical accident arises during the first fault yet and, therefore, the faulted circuit is not disconnected upon this first fault; however, a check of the insulation condition is prescribed by means of insulation monitoring devices or other devices. A release of the protective device due to high overcurrent can take place only upon a second fault, which occurred in another phase and usually in a different electrical device. If the exposed conductive parts of loads in the system are connected to a common protective conductor, a short-circuit current determined by the fault loop impedance flows through the conductors during the second fault. The aforesaid situation can be seen as a certain analogy to the TN system; however, the difference is that the first and the second fault can be – in the most unfavourable case – located at the farthermost, opposite ends of the installation. Thus, it is necessary to reckon a double length of the line (see the cipher 2 in the denominator). The following condition must be met for an IT system where the neutral is not distributed:

Zs U / 2 Ia The following condition must be met for an IT system where the neutral is distributed:

Z΄s U0 / 2 Ia whereas: Zs ......... fault loop impedance consisting of the phase conductor and the protective conductor, Z´s ........ fault loop impedance consisting of the neutral conductor and the protective conductor, U0 ........ nominal voltage between the phase and the neutral conductor, U ......... nominal voltage between phases,

Ia .......... breaking current of the protective device, which disconnects within the specified period of time (for 230/400V, the disconnection time is 0.4s for a system where neutral is not distributed and 0.8s for a system where neutral is distributed. The disconnection times are shorter for extra dangerous areas.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


If the exposed conductive parts of loads in an IT system are connected to earth individually or in groups, the following condition applies for automatic disconnection regardless of whether residual-current devices or overcurrent protective devices are used for the automatic disconnection:

RA UL / Ia whereas: RA ........ earthing resistance of the protected load’s earth electrode, including the

resistance of the protective conductor to exposed conductive parts [], UL ........ permanent touch voltage limit [V], Ia .......... operating current of the overcurrent protective device of the protected equipment [A]. Because of their properties, IT systems are used in heavy-duty facilities requiring non-stop operation (mines, metallurgical works, special plants, etc.) where they usually work with 500V voltage at present. A special type of IT systems used in hospitals and medical locations is the isolated medical system (IMS), which you can find in particular in operating rooms (voltage 230V). The requirements for IMS are specified in a separate standard IEC 60364-7-710 – Electrical installation in medical locations. IMS is quite unique from a certain point of view because special isolation transformers are used in order to create the isolated system. These transformers must meet, inter alia, the requirements of VDE 0107 applicable to electrical devices in medical locations (their types offered by Moeller are included in the database) and are connected to a TN system by primary winding. The input impedance components for the isolating transformer (typical transformation ratio 230V / 230V) can easily be obtained directly from the TN system in the given connection point.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Voltage Drops, Load Distribution, Selectivity _______________________________________________

4.1 Allowed voltage drops Electric current is formed during any consumption from the electric network. The passage of this current leads to voltage drops in the respective lines and, thus, the voltage supplied all the way to the load is not equal to the voltage on the power source terminals, it is rather lower. Indeed, various voltage drops are prescribed for the particular parts of an electrical circuit. As for the voltage drop from the power supply to the consumption point, the considerations can be based on the prescribed voltage deviations (IEC 60038), which are to range between + 6 percent and -10 percent from their nominal value. (Starting from 2003 year, this range should be 10 percent.) This means that the total voltage drop from the power supply to the consumption point can be up to 16 percent. Within the electrical installation itself in a building (i.e. inside the facility), it is recommended according to IEC 60364-5-52 that the voltage drop between the beginning of the installation and the user’s operating equipment should not exceed 4 percent of the installation rated voltage. This recommendation collides somewhat with the requirements of other national standards (e.g. CSN 33 2130 in Czech Republic), which lays down the following maximum voltage drops for the particular installation parts: 1. From the distribution board behind the electric meter (indoor distribution box) to appliances:

for lighting outlets 2 %,

for boiler and heater outlets (include washing machines) 3 %

for sockets and other outlets 5 %

2. Lines between the electric meter distribution box and compact indoor distribution box

for lighting and composite consumption 2 %

for consumption other than concerning lighting 3 %

We can admit that higher drops than those specified above may occur in a certain segments when dimensioning the lines with respect to compliance with other requirements provided the following drops will not be exceeded in the lines leading from the service connection point to the appliance:

for lighting outlets 4 %,

for boiler and heater outlets (include washing machines) 6 %,

for sockets and other outlets 8 %.

As you can see, you can get up to the actual functional limit of some devices and equipment when you add all the allowed voltage drops (in the distribution network and the electrical installation) together. (In case of relays and contactors, for instance, their function is guaranteed from 85 percent of their rated voltage and above, in case of electric motors it is guaranteed from 90 percent of their

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


rated voltage). Therefore, it is essential to follow the aforesaid recommendation (drop up to 4 percent) as stipulated in IEC 60364-5-52. More stringent requirements for voltage drops in industrial distributions are laid down in national standard (e.g. CSN 34 1610 in Czech Republic). This standard stipulates that:

the voltage drop at the motor load terminals caused by its rated current shall not exceed 5 percent of the nominal voltage of the installation (i.e. the voltage shall not drop below 95 percent of the nominal voltage),

the voltage drop at the light source point caused by the design load shall not exceed 3 percent of the nominal voltage of the installation (i.e. the voltage shall not drop below 97 percent of the nominal voltage),

the voltage drop at the heating appliance point caused by the design load shall not exceed 5 percent of the nominal voltage of the installation (i.e. the voltage shall not drop below 95 percent of the nominal voltage).

We point out that the requirements of national standards do not concern voltage drops in a certain part of the line. The regulation concerns the requirement on the possible voltage drop allowed in relation to the nominal voltage. For instance, the transformer terminals may have a voltage equivalent to 110 percent of the nominal voltage, from which the voltage drops may then be 15 percent and 13 percent, respectively. Thus, the designer has a certain “elbow room“ in how the voltage drops from the power supply to the load should be designed in such cases. xSpider provides a new useful function, which gives you the option of setting the limit drops locally for the particular nodes and network branches.

4.2 Comments on the voltage drop calculation It must be also explained how the voltage drops are calculated or how they are added together, as the case may be. As far as purely active consumptions such as electrical heating appliances and small cross-section lines are concerned, the situation is quite simple. Voltage drops are products of line currents and resistances, which can be easily added together. As far as loads such as motors are concerned, the nature of consumption of which is active and inductive, and as far as impedances of the line Z composed of the real component R (resistance) and the imaginary component X (inductance), these complex variables are multiplied. The result of this multiplication is a complex variable again, i.e. a complex voltage drop. This variable describes the voltage drops in the real and the imaginary axis of the coordinates. Therefore, the absolute values of these drops in the particular line segments from the power source to the load may not be added together in the ordinary manner, instead they must be added together only as complex numbers again (i.e. the real and the imaginary components separately). The program user should thus not be surprised that the sums of absolute values of the voltage drops are often not an accurate sum of their absolute values in the particular lines linked to each other. The same situation applies to the sum of impedances and currents. According to the Kirchhoff’s law, the sum of currents in the nodes must be equal to zero whereas for the sum of absolute values, however, this is may not be the case.

4.3 Load calculation for the particular network branches xSpider allows you to calculate also the load in the particular network branches (represented by cables and conductors) under various load distribution within the network. In this case, the program calculates with complex values of currents and impedances again. Therefore it is not possible - just

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


like in the previous case - to add the current loads in the particular branches together simply as an arithmetical sum of all absolute current values, but separately for the real and the imaginary components. Provided these rules are observed, you can determine the respective load with any network configuration. Similar rules should also be followed when calculating the short-circuit currents, since the network impedance used for the short-circuit calculation is expressed in the complex form as well.

4.4 Coordination between protective devices The aim of the coordination is to ensure that only the one protective device is going to disconnect the fault or the overload, which is the closest one to the fault point or the location where the overload occurs. Therefore, if you want to maintain coordination (discrimination) between two protective devices arranged after each other, their characteristics may not intersect in any point and if the characteristics are defined by zones instead of one unambiguous line, these zones may not intersect either. The characteristics may not intersect and their zones may not overlap either for the overcurrents corresponding to the overloads or for the short-circuit currents. The figures below show different situations of ensuring the discrimination, either for all overcurrents (Fig. a, b) or only in a certain range of overcurrents (Fig. c).

a) Protection by two fuses: discrimination ensured for all currents

b) Protection by two circuit breakers, discrimination ensured for all currents.

c) Protection by two circuit breakers and a fuse: discrimination of circuit breakers ensured in full the range of currents lower than I1, discrimination between the

circuit breakers cannot be ensured for the range of currents between I1 and I2; the fuse with the characteristics 3 will disconnect for currents exceeding I2.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


An example of graphical outputs from xSpider (the module of Tripping Characteristics) follows: The figure illustrates a practical situation of how selectivity between the FA1 and FA8 circuit breakers can be ensured. The FA1 circuit breaker is located closer to the component or circuit with overcurrent protection, and the FA8 circuit breaker is located farther from this component or circuit. Thus, the FA8 circuit breaker is upstream in relation to the FA1 circuit breaker. A typical example of such wiring configuration is that the FA1 circuit breaker protects a 63 A outlet, for instance, and the FA8 circuit breaker protects four such outlets, for which the simultaneous design current of 125 A is anticipated. It is naturally desirable that solely the FA1 circuit breaker disconnects when a single 63 A outlet only is overloaded. This ensures that the supply for other outlets continues without interruption in such case. With any potential overcurrent (whether under overload or at short circuit), the FA1 circuit breaker will respond earlier than the FA 8 circuit breaker would. You can satisfy yourself of that from the figure. Subtract the disconnection time, for instance, for 200 A. The FA1 circuit breaker will disconnect at first - within the period of approximately 17 s, and the FA8 circuit breaker would disconnect only much later - within about 200 s. Similarly you can also trace that the FA8 circuit breaker would disconnect later than the FA1 circuit breaker for every overcurrent, which can be assumed to occur in the given circuit. In such case, the FA8 circuit breaker acts as a standby device if the FA1 circuit breaker failed or if the sum of currents of all circuits supplied by the lines protected by the FA8 circuit breaker reaches up to the overcurrent range. This could happen in fact if the anticipated coincidental simultaneousness was exceeded that is when the aforesaid circuits were used and all four circuits protected by the FA1 circuit breakers would withdraw their full design current at the same time. More detailed information about the protective devices are provided in chapter “Properties of protective devices“ (see Part I. Chap. 5).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A special xSpider function gives you the possibility to evaluate the selectivity of two circuit-breakers also based on selectivity tables specified in the power circuit-breaker catalogue. These tables were compiled on the basis of short-circuit test results and, for standard cases, they offer more precise, verified results. The following basic situations can occur:

Full selectivity (T): the outgoing circuit-breaker (2) will trip, while the incoming circuit-breaker (1) remains on.

Partial selectivity: selectivity between the relevant circuit-breakers is secured, if the short-circuit current Ik

’’ is lower than a specified value. In such case, the outgoing circuit-breaker (2) will trip, while the incoming circuit-breaker (1) remains on.

No selectivity: both circuit-breakers, the outgoing (2) as well as the incoming (1) will trip. Cannot be evaluated: the pair under examination was not found in the selectivity table;

selectivity must be evaluated through a comparison of their tripping characteristics, as specified above.

4.5 Cascading of protective devices Cascading of protective devices means their arrangement with respect to the impacts of the short-circuit currents. Probably all of us roughly understand the principle of correct ordination of protective devices, which must be ranged in a way to ensure that the short-circuit current be disconnected before any of the devices could be damaged. Nevertheless, we provide several explanatory comments to be on the safe side. The previous paragraphs told us that the protective device should disconnect such overcurrent, which would endanger the protected line. If we summarize it and simplify it, it is true that the higher the current is, the earlier the protective device should disconnected. But can the protective device disconnect any current? This would naturally be the ideal situation. However, it is not the case in reality. We did not deal with the question of what happens if the overcurrent is too high. In such case, the protective device might not disconnect the overcurrent and it will be damaged. This situation is undesirable of course. Relevant checks and verifications must be carried out in order to avoid such situation,. On one hand, the protective devices are checked for the maximum current they are in fact able to withstand. On the other hand, the designer calculates the maximum overcurrent (i.e. typically the short-circuit current), which may possibly occur in the place where the protective device is located. The former case concerns the design issue of the protective device, the latter concerns the layout and configuration of the circuits, in which the protective devices are employed. But there is also another option. The protective device located farther will not withstand the anticipated short-circuit current in the short-circuit point, however, this short-circuit current will be limited by the upstream protective device. The limitation consists in disconnecting the short-circuit current before the first half-wave of the anticipated short-circuit current reaches its maximum point (i.e. the current, which would flow through circuit if the protective device was not included). This is shown in the figure below where the waveform of the anticipated short-circuit current ik and the waveform of the limited current io. The maximum values of this limited short-circuit current Io depend on the magnitude of the anticipated short-circuit current ik. Even if the short-circuit current is limited by the protective device during its first half- period, this limited current is the higher the faster is the short-circuit current increase. Therefore, the higher the anticipated short-circuit current is, the higher also the limited short-circuit current Io is (duration of one half- period is always 10 ms). However, the waveform of the anticipated short-circuit current does not describe its immediate values, but its r.m.s. value in steady state. This value is marked as Ik. The maximum value of the

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


short-circuit current (at the sinusoid peak) is Ikm = Ik ×2. Ik represents the short-circuit current, i.e. its effective value in steady state. When showing the graphical dependence of the maximum value of the limited current Io on the anticipated short-circuit current Ik, this short-circuit current is typically labeled Ip (the p-index can be remembered to represent the fault current). An example of such dependence is shown in the figure below. In this case a fuse with the nominal current of 63 A or 100 A, as the case may be, acts as the limiting component. You can see that the short-circuit current, the r.m.s. value of which is 10 kA (i.e. its maximum value is approximately 14 kA), is limited to 4 kA with the 63 A fuse and to 7 kA with a 100 A fuse. These so-called limiting characteristics are supplied by the device manufacturers and are included in xSpider in digital form. In order to ensure that the protective device arranged behind the component designed to limit the short-circuit current is suitable for this limited short-circuit current, the maximum value of the short-circuit current that the second component can withstand must exceed the maximum value of the limited short-circuit current Io. This second protective device is usually a circuit breaker. Such values of the short-circuit current are indicated for the circuit breakers, which the respective circuit breaker is able to disconnect. These are the so-called short-circuit breaking capacities of the circuit breaker (namely the limit breaking capacity Icu and the operating breaking capacity Ics - see below). And precisely these values must be compared with the value of the limited short-circuit current Io. However, there is one more detail that must be kept in mind when doing so. The breaking capacities of circuit breakers are specified in r.m.s. values, whereas the value of the limited short-circuit current Io is the actual maximum value of the limited current. In order to be able to compare both numbers, we must recalculate the r.m.s. value of the short-circuit breaking capacity Ic to the maximum value Icmax. The relation equals to Icmax = Ic ×2. It must be true that Ic × 2 Io. For Ic you substitute either the limit short-circuit breaking capacity Icu or the operating short-circuit breaking capacity Ics of the circuit breaker. This selection depends on if you need the circuit breaker to be still functioning after the short circuit - in that case you substitute Ics, or if it is sufficient for you that the circuit breaker is able to withstand the short-circuit current safely - you substitute Icu.

Conventional components used to limit high short-circuit currents are fuses. This capacity was not previously presumed for circuit breakers at all. It was counted on the situation that - even with the short-circuit current - there will be several periods of the short-circuit current passing through and

Waveform of limitation of the anticipated short-circuit current ik

Limiting characteristics of fuses

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


only then the circuit breaker will disconnect. However, the nowadays manufactured installation circuit breakers (MCB) do have a limiting capacity and break the short-circuit current before its first half-wave reaches its peak. To summarize the findings mentioned above, we can recommend the following procedure to check the protective devices from the point of view of their short-circuit resistance:

1. Calculate the maximum short-circuit current Ik, which can pass through the protective device. It is usually the current arising with a three-phase short circuit at the protective device location.

2. Check whether the protective device is able to withstand the given short-circuit current. If the protective device is to comply, its breaking capacity must be higher than the short-circuit current. If you want to be really sure, consider the surge short-circuit current Ikm, the value of which is Ikm = K × Ik, whereas K usually does not exceed the value of 1.6. Therefore, if you want to be sure, the breaking capacity (i.e. either Ics or Icu for power circuit breakers) must be greater than 1.6 Ik. If the selected protective device does not meet this condition, you can select a protective device with a higher short-circuit resistance.

3. Check whether the upstream protective device is able to limit the short-circuit current to the extent that the value of the limited short-circuit current Io (i.e. its maximum value) is lower than the maximum value of the short-circuit current corresponding to the breaking capacity of the given protective device, i.e. is lower than Ic × 2 Io (when you substitute either the limit short-circuit breaking capacity Ics or the operating short-circuit breaking capacity Icu of the circuit breaker for Ic).

If the above-mentioned condition is not met, you can select either a protective device with a higher breaking capacity or you can connect an upstream protective device that will secure a greater limitation the short-circuit current more (fuses can be used nearly in all cases).

4.6 Reactive power compensation Electrical equipment, such as electric motors, transformers, fluorescent tube chokes and many other, do not consume only active energy from the network, but also the reactive (idle) energy which is required to ensure their proper functions. The problem is that the transmission network is loaded with the sum of both these energies. In order to reduce the reactive energy transmitted by the system, a compensation condenser is connected to the appliance or to its neighborhood, which supplies the reactive energy directly to the appliance, thus reducing the volume of the reactive energy transmitted in the network. The quality of the reactive energy compensation is determined by the cos power factor, which is the ratio of the active power P and the apparent power S. The following relation applies with a certain simplification:

cos = P / S

The apparent power S consists of the active and the reactive power components:

S P Q 2 2

whereas: cos ........ power factor (cosine of the phase shift angle between the voltage and the current - for 50 Hz)

P .............. active power [W] S ............... apparent power [VA] Q .............. reactive power [var]

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The ideal situation is to reach the power factor as close to one as possible. If the power factor is too low, then the consumer is penalized for drawing reactive energy. Depending on the extent and stability of consumption, various types of compensation are used: individual, group or central compensation. As for individual compensation, the condenser is switched on directly with the load, while the group and the central compensation is suitable for larger electric systems with variable load. Here the condenser switching is controlled by an automatic controller, which ensures that the required power factor is reached. In all cases referred to above it applies, however, that the compensation located in any network point influences the entire system.

The picture on the right shows a simplified diagram of a parallel connected compensation condenser. The current phasor is changed due to that, from I´ to IK. Following the compensation, the net line current is going to change to IK = I´+IC .

With the C capacitor (condenser) you achieve the compensation power of:

QI

CC

2

whereas: QC ... capacitor output [var] I ...... effective current value [A] ..... angular frequency ( = 2 f ; for 50 Hz it is 314) C ..... condenser capacity [F]

Solely delta connection (CD) is used in fact for condensers in three-phase network. xSpider allows using condensers also in star connection, however, these can be employed only for one-phase loads. After connecting a condenser, you can deduct the current flowing through the condenser and use it to select the condenser contactors (Moeller offer full series of them). The required power factor can be obtained by selecting a suitable condenser. However, it is necessary to point out that the program does not perform any automatic check of the original to the final power factor, but calculates the state with a specific selected condenser. During the aforesaid check, you can try the maximum output of the compensation batteries for instance, which will be needed in the given network in order not to over-compensate the network or not to use compensation batteries with unnecessarily high power (up to now usually by estimate) in the design. The reduction of power of the connected condensers is then carried out through an automatic mechanism, which is a standard component of compensation distribution boards. xSpider allows you also to compare the voltage drop before and after the compensation because the reduction in the apparent output leads to a decrease in the current as well. It is demonstrable that reduction of losses occurring during the transmission of electric energy is a very beneficial measure since other methods, such as increased cross-section, increased rated voltage etc., are not economical and, from the technical point of view, often feasible only with difficulties. Through calculations you can also check that it is even possible to reduce the cross-section of the lines used in some cases.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Note (taken over from: “Reactive power compensation in practice“): „Countless range of articles and many post-graduate theses were written during the last hundred years about what reactive power is and what it is not. A series of professional conferences has naturally also dealt with the reactive power mysteries. And the result of the entire research and investigation on the physical substance of the reactive power has been more or less also idle and fruitless so far. The only thesis, on which the top world experts agree unanimously, doesn’t say anything more than that the reactive power is something different from the active power and, therefore, everyone must also pay for it separately….“

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


5. Properties of Protective Devices _______________________________________________ In order to ensure that a protective device is used properly in electric circuits, it is necessary to know both the basic parameters of the circuit (short-circuit conditions, load type etc.) as well as the properties of the protective device (type of the tripping characteristic, breaking capacity etc.). Parameters of the protective device, which are guaranteed by the manufacturer in the catalogue documentation, determine whether the respective device is suitable for use in the given circuit. At the same time you need to know which parameter of the protective device (such as Icn, Icu, Ics, Icw) can be assigned to which parameter of the short-circuit current (such as Ik

’’, Ikm) in the given circuit. Note: all currents exceeding the rated current in the circuit are called “overcurrent“. The term “overcurrent“ includes the “overload“ situations (low overcurrents, several folds of In) and “short-circuit“ situations (large overcurrents).

5.1 Fuses Fuses are currently regulated by the set of standards IEC/EN 60269. Fuses can be classified according to different aspects such as the design (power fuses - fuse links with blade contact , plug, cylindrical etc. type), type of the tripping characteristic ((gG/gL: for general use - for predominant part of applications; aM: for motor circuit protection - only for short-circuit protection; gR, aR: for semiconductor protection et al.), according to the current type (AC, DC), nominal voltage etc. The types and designs vary also depending on the national practice. Overload: In the overload field, i.e. at low overcurrents, it is necessary to take into account that the disconnection times of fuses will be relatively longer than those of circuit breakers. The definition of the fuse tripping characteristics implies for instance that the fuse can disconnect not sooner than after 1 hour when the current of 1.6 In passes through, while the agreed breaking currents for circuit breakers are lower. Short-circuit currents: The most important feature of fuses is the high breaking capacity at short circuit, which predetermines the fuses - considering their very small size - to be used for the main or the backup protection of circuits and devices against short circuits. The nominal breaking capacity of fuses is specified as a single number Icn and ranges usually from 50 kA up to 120 kA (depending on the fuse type, power factor, voltage etc.). For overcurrents starting from ca. 20 In above, you can expect the fuses to show their limiting characteristics when the short-circuit current is limited before it reaches its maximum value (thus, disconnection must take place within 5 ms, at the latest, with the frequency of 50 Hz). The limited current (commonly marked Io) is expressed in the maximum value. A typical course of the limiting characteristics is obvious from the figure provided in Chapter 4.5. Two parallel lines are shown in this figure:

the bottom line expresses the peak (limited) value of the symmetric short-circuit current (anticipated),

the top line expresses the peak (limited) value of the asymmetric short-circuit current, i.e. the most unfavorable state.

The decision on which one of the lines should be used, depends on the state of the circuit, which we examine for the short circuit.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Another option of describing the properties of fuses is quantification of the energy allowed to pass through the fuses into the circuit (i.e. the energy resulting in a rise of the line temperature), which is expressed by the I2t parameter (the Joule integral). It is deducted from the limiting characteristics provided in the catalogue documentation. Limitation of the short-circuit current has a positive impact on the line temperature rise and on the reduction of the dynamic load of conductors and distribution boards. Fuse selection criterion in a circuit with known short-circuit conditions:

Icn Ik“

whereas: Icn .... nominal short-circuit breaking capacity of the fuse Ik

“ ..... initial impulse short-circuit current Discrimination of fuses: Discrimination of two fuses in series connection is generally guaranteed for the ratio of nominal currents being 1: 1.6, unless stipulated otherwise by the manufacturer. As a precondition, however, the tripping characteristics must be of the same type (see Chap. 4.4, Fig. a).

5.2 Circuit breakers Depending on the purpose of use, we must take into account right two basic regulations for circuit breakers which are specified the most frequently in the catalogues, EN 60898 and EN 60947-2. EN 60898 Electrical accessories - Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for household and similar installations (2003) EN 60898 is intended for circuit breakers used for building installations (also called installation circuit breakers) where you can expect their operation by laymen. Nominal currents nowadays range up to 125 A. The tripping characteristic is shown in the figure in Chapter 2.3. Overload due to low overcurrents: Specific limits are determined for low overcurrents, in which the release may not respond or must respond to the overload. The agreed non-breaking current (Int) applies for 1.13 In, the agreed breaking current (It ) is 1.45 In . This means that the circuit breaker may not disconnect in the agreed period of time if a current under the value of 1.13 In is passing through, and the circuit breaker must disconnect in the agreed period of time if the current exceeds 1.45 In. The agreed period time is either 1 hour (for In 63 A) or 2 hours (for In > 63 A). These limits are prescribed in general regardless of the type of the tripping characteristic. The data specified above apply for the reference ambient temperature of 30 °C, with the circuit breakers having no temperature compensation. Short-circuit currents: In the area of short-circuit release response, the standard EN 60898 prescribes altogether three types of tripping characteristics with different setting limits - from 3 to 5 In for B type, from 5 to 10 In for C type and from 10 to 20 In for D type, respectively. The area of short-circuit release action has a direct impact on the correct circuit breaker selection in the circuit in those cases when we want to meet the conditions for fault disconnection within the prescribed time. It is also directly related with meeting the condition of the maximum loop impedance value in TN system. Thus, in this connection we are solving the problem of ensuring such loop impedance, which would guarantee at least the minimum short-circuit current being formed in a fault circuit that ensures the respond of the short circuit release. Every higher current would then guarantee a fast disconnection of the fault circuit within milliseconds. The nominal short-circuit breaking

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


capacity (Icn) of the circuit breaker must be taken in account in the area of high short-circuit currents. This circuit breaker capacity reaches the values of 6, 10, 15, 20 and 25 kA. If the short-circuit current exceeds the nominal breaking capacity of the circuit breaker, the circuit breaker will be damaged. One of the options to prevent such situation is to use an upstream fuse (the fuse value is 100 A for FAZ circuit breakers or 200 A for AZ circuit breakers). In this case we talk about the circuit breaker backup protection. The limiting factor present when using an upstream fuse in front of the circuit breaker in order to secure a backup protection is a certain constraint of the discrimination. Specific values of the maximum selectivity current, for which the circuit breaker/fuse combination is still selective, are specified by the circuit breaker manufacturers in their catalogues in the form of tables (the table data are verified by measurements). Selection criterion for installation circuit breakers (MCB) in a circuit with known short-circuit conditions:

Icn Ik“

whereas: Icn ..... nominal short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breaker Ik

“ ..... initial impulse short-circuit current Note: For simplification, the Icn value is used in the Ics column for miniature circuit breakers in the xSpider database. Selectivity (discrimination) of installation circuit breakers: In addition, EN 60898 defines three classes of energy limitation at short circuit for circuit breakers up to 32 A. Most of the circuit breakers belong to the third class (limitation class 3, class of discrimination 3 as well) and, in fact, circuit breakers for higher currents fall under this category, too (such as PLHT and AZ circuit breakers up to 125 A). The advantage of these limiting circuit breakers is the high limitation of the passed energy comparable with fuses and thus also a very low temperature rise in the line at short circuits (only several degrees °C or tens of degrees °C in extraordinary cases). Their disadvantage is the impossibility of selective grading of two circuit breakers in the same, i.e. the third selectivity class, arranged after each other because limiting circuit breakers arranged after each other disconnect virtually with the same speed. Selectivity in full range of the operating currents could be theoretically possible only for large intervals between the nominal currents (ca. tenfold In by estimate), which is not applicable in practice. But beware of the commonly spread mistake that the selectivity of two installation circuit breakers can be solved by sole grading of the B, C and D type characteristics! Both limiting circuit breakers (such as a 32 A circuit breaker with C characteristic and a 10 A circuit breaker with B characteristic) disconnect approximately with the same speed at a short circuit and their passed energy is comparable. The selectivity problem can be solved only by using two circuit breakers with very different values of the energy passed through, i.e. with different disconnection speed at short circuit), such as by using a power circuit breaker with higher current (according to EN 60 947-2) as the first one and then, arranged behind it, an installation circuit breaker with B, C or D characteristics (according to EN 60898). The graphical illustration of this situation is shown in Fig. b) in Chapter 4.4. Note: residual current devices with inbuilt overcurrent protection (according to EN 61009) are sometimes used for overcurrent protection by means of combined residual current devices with circuit breakers. The conditions for circuit breakers as laid down in EN 60898 can be applied to those without changes.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


EN 60947 Low voltage switchgear and conrolgear. Part 2: Circuit breakers (1997) Circuit breakers assessed according to EN 60947-2 are designed in particular for industrial use and it is presumed that these devices will always be operated only persons with electrical qualification (qualified operator). The standard applies both to line circuit breakers as well as to motor circuit breakers for any currents and design methods and for any recommended application, and it applies also to circuit breakers with adjustable releases. Overload due to low overcurrents: the tripping characteristics is determined by two binding values only, namely the value of the conventional non tripping current of 1.05 In and the conventional tripping current of 1.3 In. The agreed period of time is 1 hour for In 63 A and then 2 hours for In > 63 A). Unless provided otherwise, the reference ambient temperature is preferably 30 °C. Short-circuit currents: the standard does not stipulate any limits for adjustment of the short-circuit releases and their labeling of tripping characteristics. Therefore, the manufacturer itself can define the labeling and setting for its circuit breakers (such the R, S characteristics, etc.). One of the most important properties of circuit breakers is their ability to safely disconnect short circuit currents at repeated occasions. Circuit breakers considered according to EN 60947-2 are mostly called “power circuit breakers“ and are characterized by several values of breaking capacities:

nominal ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu) – value of the short-circuit current specified on the circuit breaker for the respective nominal voltage, which the circuit breaker must disconnect safely. After such disconnection, however, its characteristics may change. In other words, disconnection of the short-circuit current with the value of I = Icu is guaranteed for one single time only. Although it may seem like a technical nonsense at the first sight to dimension the circuit breakers for the Icu value (one-time disposable circuit breaker?), it has been proven in practice that faults do not occur immediately on the output terminals of the circuit breakers and that even a relatively small line impedance behind the circuit breaker is sufficient to reduce the short-circuit current efficiently under Icu..

nominal service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) – value of the short-circuit current specified on the circuit breaker for the respective nominal voltage. It is expressed by the prospective breaking current (in kA) corresponding to one of the values laid down by the standard. It is most frequently expressed in percentage rate (25, 50, 75 and 100% Icu) relative to the Icu value, i.e. for a circuit breaker with Ics = 75% Icu and Icu = 100 kA, for instance, Ics = 75 kA. Ics must be disconnected by the circuit breakers repeatedly and, therefore, it is only up to the designer what extent of long-term operating reliability he/she wants to use for the calculations - whether the circuit breakers will be designed with respect to Ics, or to Icu. It also relates to the price of the circuit breakers.

nominal service short-circuit making capacity (Icm) – value of the short-circuit current specified on the circuit breaker for the respective nominal voltage, nominal frequency and the given power factor. It is expressed as the maximum anticipated dynamic current (the maximum value of the first half- period with the direct-current component of the short-circuit current being included). The nominal short-circuit making capacity (Icm) is always higher than the nominal short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu or Ics, as the case may be) and their minimum ratio is prescribed by the regulations to range from 1.5 up to 2.2.

Note: The aspect of the short-circuit currents comes to the forefront of the designer's interest in particular in the vicinity of the power source where the direct-current component of the short-circuit current Ia also has its effect in addition to the alternating component of the current Ik. You should not forget the dynamic effects Idyn of the short circuits, which are important in particular when assessing the short-circuit resistance of distribution boards (Idyn assessment is carried out according to the Ikm parameter).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Selection criteria for power circuit breakers in a circuit with known short-circuit conditions: a) according to the nominal short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breaker

Icu Ik’’

whereas: Icu ..... nominal short-circuit breaking capacity of the circuit breaker Ik

“ ..... initial impulse short-circuit current

*) In case of more demanding operating requirements where you need to work with a sufficient reserve of parameters, it is possible to dimension the circuit breakers for the Ics parameter, which is supported by xSpider. b) according to the nominal short-circuit switching capacity of the circuit breaker:

Icm km whereas: Icm .... nominal short-circuit switching capacity of the fuse Ikm .... peak short-circuit current (also labeled ip) Selectivity (discrimination) of power circuit breakers: The issue of selectivity of two and more power circuit breakers arranged in series is solved in following manner. EN 60974-2 defines two groups of circuit breakers. The so-called A category of use (common, non-selective circuit breakers) and then the B category of use for selective circuit breakers with adjustable delay (at least 50 ms; preferable values are 0.05 - 0.1 - 0.25 - 0.5 - 1s). A certain parameter similar to the one for cables is introduced for the B-category circuit breakers, i.e. in the selective design, namely the nominal short-time withstand current Icw, which describes the circuit breaker’s ability to transmit the short-circuit current equivalent precisely to Icw throughout the duration of the forced delay. Manufacturers of power circuit breakers specify the most frequent periods for short-time delay. They are 0.1 s, 0.3 s, 1 s or 3 s. The circuit breaker located closer to the fault point typically is not of a selective design (A category of use) and will disconnect the fault within a short time - in tens of milliseconds as the maximum. – Than the Icw parameter of the selective circuit breaker usually does not need to be used in full.

EN 60947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section One - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor Starters (1992) The group of circuit breakers, which is regulated by EN 60947-1, includes also motor starters which can be, in other words, described as a special design of motor-protective circuit breakers. They are characterized by the possibility to adjust the overcurrent releases and the thermal release must be set to the rated current of the motor, i.e. the release must be set to the “adjustment current“ in order to ensure their correct function. A similar procedure is applied when using thermal overcurrent relays which, however, require a short-circuit protection of the switching device to be used (such as a fuse, preferably in aM characteristic).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Bibliographic Reference _______________________________________________

1. Kříž M.: Dimensioning and Protection of Electrical Equipment - Tables and Examples. Volume 56, IN-EL, Prague 2001, second updated edition 2008

2. Rudolph W.: Safety of Electrical Installations up to 1000 Volts, VDE Verlag GmbH - Berlin - Offenbach 1990

3. IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007) Electrical Equipment Part 4: Safety. Chapter 41: Protection against Electrical Accident.

4. IEC 60364-4-43 Electrical equipment Part 4: Safety. Chapter 43: Overcurrent protection. 5. IEC 60364-5-523 Electrical Equipment Part 5: Selecting and Building Electrical Equipment.

Chapter 52: Selecting Systems and Building Lines. Section 523: Allowed Currents. 6. IEC 1200-53 Guideline for Electrical Installations. Part 53: Selecting and Building Electrical

Equipment. Switching and Controlling Devices. 7. EN 60947 Switching and Controlling Devices (1994), a set of regulations. 8. EN 60898 Circuit Breakers for Overload Protection of House and Similar Installations (mod

IEC 898:1987) 9. IEC 60909 Calculation of Conditions at Short Circuits in a Three-Phase Electrification

Network 10. IEC 60909 Short-circuit current calculation in three-phase a.c. systems (mod IEC 909:1988) 11. Prof. Dr. Roland Zeise: The Computer-Aided Dimensioning of Low-Voltage networks,

Moeller GmbH, Bonn TB 0820-031 GB 12. Korenc V., Holoubek J.: Reactive power compensation in practice. Volume 39, IN-EL,

Prague 1999

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


PART II: xSpider - Program Operation

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


7. Introduction _______________________________________________ The xSpider software system is a graphically oriented design system for dimensioning of low-voltage networks fitted with circuit protection equipment of Moeller brand. It calculates voltage drops, load distributions and short-circuit currents for radial as well as meshed networks and carries out a subsequent check of suitability of the cables and protection equipment used. The calculation methods are based on IEC standards. It is an independent program requiring only the operating system of Windows. The software is intended primarily for designers and computational engineers. General:

Design of TN/TT/IT systems of various voltage systems up to 1000 V (400/230V, 690/400V, …).

Design of radial as well as meshed networks.

Design of networks supplied from one or more different power supplies (supergrid, transformer, generator), design of networks supplied concurrently from different power sources.

Possibility to simulate various operating states of the network by disconnecting power sources and loads.

Possibility to define simultaneous and utilization factors.

Database of components with transparent tree structure allowing user-defined additions.

All calculations (voltage drops, load distribution, impedance, short circuits) are based on IEC standards.

User-friendly interface allowing easy and fast entry of simple cases while maintaining the maximum variability and open-end character. User operation similar to standard CAD systems (AutoCAD).

Program core using the options of Windows95/98/NT/2000/XP/Vista. Network topology:

Use of MDI interface - possibility for parallel processing of several projects.

The network wiring diagram (topology) is defined by combining the particular components (power sources, transformers, circuit lines, circuit protection equipment, loads) in the graphics. A function is available to insert standard component groups with a single click (power supply group, couplings, outlets, …).

Standard functions used for graphics editing are available (copy, move, erase, stretch). Standard functions for display control (zoom, pan).

Network nodes are created automatically on a continuous basis. Connection logic check. Option to transfer objects among projects by means of the clipboard.

Possibility to add free graphics (line, circle, rectangle, text). Parameters of network components, database of components

Parameters of the inserted components (i.e. those components, which cannot be dimensioned within the program - power sources, loads, transformers) must be entered immediately after inserting the respective component into the network wiring diagram.

Parameters of other components (circuit protection equipment, cables) can be also entered or they will be dimensioned by the program automatically.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A database of standard components is available (Generators, Transformers, Cables, Circuit-breakers, Fuses, Switch-disconnectors, Motors, Compensation units).

The database is built as open-ended and the user can add any components into the database that he uses in his projects. It is possible to create a database tree as well as data tables.

The option of adding items to the databases by the user is important in particular with components not supplied by Moeller (Generators, Transformers, Cables, Motors, Compensation units).

Parameters of components taken from the database can be edited locally after being inserted into the network.

Calculations

The calculations are based on IEC standards. A TN, IT or TT systems considered alternatively, depending on the user’s selection, for the selected voltage system up to 1,000 V, and the short circuits are electrically remote.

Voltage drops in nodal points of the network (a check whether the drop does not exceed the user-defined maximum value set locally for every network component). The utilization factor is always taken into account. For radial networks, the simultaneous factor is also taken into account.

Load distribution in the network lines (check of correct dimensioning of the circuit protection equipment and conductors according to IEC 60364-5-523), check of line protection for overload and short circuit according to IEC 60364-4-43. Calculation of power factor for meshed networks.

Three-phase symmetric short circuit, calculation according to IEC 60909 - calculation of the short-circuit current in the selected network point, distribution of short-circuit current flows in the network (check of correct dimensioning of the circuit protection equipment and conductors). Contribution from motors is taken into account.

Solving of cascades – checking the breaking capacities of the outgoing protective components at the outgoers with respect to the incoming protective components at the incomers.

A function to evaluate circuit-breaker selectivity based on circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker selectivity tables as specified in the catalogue.

Two-phase asymmetric short circuit, calculation according to IEC 60909 - calculation of the short-circuit current between phases, the current into the ground at the short-circuit point and the short-circuit current flow in the network (check of correct dimensioning of the circuit protection equipment and conductors).

One-phase asymmetric short circuit against the ground, calculation according to IEC 60909 - calculation of the short-circuit current at the selected network point and of the short-circuit current flow in the network, calculation of impedance in the short-circuit point and of contact voltage in non-conductive parts. Calculation of the disconnection time for the short-circuit point and check of compliance with the requirements of IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007).

Calculation of the positive and zero sequence components of impedance at the network node (which can be used for the subsequent design of the connected IT network, for instance), the calculation of impedance for the fault loop Zsv according to IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007). The calculation results can be displayed either as absolute values or as complex numbers; the calculated impedances are not corrected with any coefficient.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Results display

A list of unsuitable components is displayed immediately after performing the calculation. The list can be printed out.

After the calculation has been performed, the calculated values will be displayed for the individual components in the network wiring diagram. The diagram showing the results can be printed out. It can be printed on any output device, for which a driver is available in Windows (printer, plotter).

Possibility to print tables - the list of network components with specification of the calculation results.

Option to print tables – the list of cables.

Export of graphics into DXF data format (for their subsequent import to CAD systems).

Export of data tables into TXT, TAB, XLS (Microsoft Excel) data formats. Working with the tripping characteristics

Selection of circuit protection equipment from the database and drawing of their tripping characteristics.

Selection of equipment from the network wiring diagram and drawing of their tripping characteristics - selectivity assessment possible.

Possibility to set the tag assigned to the respective characteristics, curve color setting. Gauging in the chart possible.

In case a circuit protection device is equipped with adjustable releases, it is possible to modify all parameters available. If this was a device from the wiring diagram, the change of the release parameter setting is transferred back into the wiring diagram.

Chart print on the output device (black-and-white or color print).

Archiving of the set of characteristics in a data file (an arbitrary number of such sets of characteristics can be created for one project).

Hardware and software requirements (the minimum configuration is as follows):

PC, Pentium III and higher, 64 MB and more RAM, graphics with the minimum resolution of 1,024x768, 15“ screen, mouse, output printing device (laser printer, plotter etc.).

At least 20 MB free hard-disk space,

Operating system installed - Windows95 and higher or WindowsNT 4.0 and higher, Windows2000 Professional (minimum ServicePack 1 installed), WindowsXP, or Windows Vista.

Notes:

The xSpider software is not a network program. It must always be installed on the local disk of every user.

The licence to use the program system is provided for a limited period of time. The licence is provided by Moeller Gebäudeautomation GmbH, Eugenia 1, A-3943 Schrems, Austria, the exclusive holder of rights to the program.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


8. Installation _______________________________________________

8.1 Installation from CD-ROM 1. Insert the installation CD-ROM in the drive (e.g. the D: drive).

2. Run the program \xSpider_SETUP\SETUP.EXE from the CD-ROM. Click on the Start button and select Run. A dialogue panel will open, in which you type the following text in the Open field: D:\xSpider_SETUP\SETUP.EXE (where D means the CD drive). Click OK.

3. Select the language version of the installation from the list of the options being offered.

4. Now, you are prompted to close all the running applications (programs). It is also recommended that the network drivers and antivirus programs running in the background should be disconnected. Click Next to continue the installation.

5. Read the Licence Agreement in the dialogue panel that opens up subsequently. If you agree with the conditions, select the option ‘I agree’. Then click Next.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Now, specify the directory INTO which the program is to be installed. The xSpider program is not a network program. It must always be installed on each user’s local disc. If the preset directory does not conform, click on the Browse button and specify a different directory in the dialogue panel that opens up subsequently. Click Next to continue the installation.

7. If there is already an older installation of the xSpider program in the specified destination directory, the system asks whether the files that have been modified by the user are to be transferred from the previous installation. Click Next to continue the installation.

The default directory that the program is to be installed into; this directory can be changed by editing the text, or the directory can be selected after clicking on the Browse button. If the directory already exists, you will be prompted to confirm the right selection. The program cannot be installed directly into the root directory of the hard drive or directly into the system folder. After selecting the directory, continue the installation by clicking on the Next button.

If you agree with the terms of the Licence Agreement, click on ‘I accept’ to accept the terms of the Licence Agreement. Then continue the installation by clicking on the Next button.

If the user-defined database of components (generators, motors, transformers, etc.) has been modified in the previous installation, click on this button. If you are not sure, use this button as well.

The original installation will be deleted; the user-defined database of components will not be transferred.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Please, pay attention to the following warning:

8. Specify the name of the group of programs where the program’s ‘run’ icon will be located

(the name of a new item of the Start – Programs menu). It is recommended that the pre-selected (default) name should be kept. Click Next to continue the installation.

9. The setting carried out in the previous steps is summarized at the sheet that is displayed subsequently. Please, check whether the setting complies with your requirements. By means of the Back button, you can revert the necessary number of steps and modify the individual parameters. The actual installation is to be launched by clicking on the Install button.

10. Now, the files will be copied to the hard drive of the computer, and the installation will be expanded.

11. A final report will be displayed by the installation program. This means that the installation has been completed in a correct way and that the xSpider program is ready for use. Close this dialogue panel by clicking on the Finish button. The installation program will automatically create the ‘run’ icon on the desktop, and it will carry out the association of the .SPI extension files (projects of networks) with the xSpider program (the program is activated automatically by double clicking on the file with the SPI extension in the Windows Explorer). Run the program and enter the licence (see Chap. 9.1).

12. The installed program can be removed by means of the uninstall program. Click on the Start button. Then subsequently select the items Programs - xSpider - Uninstall. The uninstall program will start, and the installation will be removed from your computer.

8.2 “Manual” customer installation in case of SETUP failure A problem may occur on some computers when installing the software from the installation CD-ROM through the standard procedure with SETUP.EXE. As an alternative solution, it is possible to install the software “manually” without using the installation program.

The list of the existing program groups (items of the ‘Start – Programs’ menu).

The name of the newly created program group (an item of the ‘Start – Programs’ menu) in which the program’s ‘run’ icon will be located.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Caution: performance of the manual installation requires certain knowledge and skills in computer operations. Should some steps from the procedure specified below be not completely clear or comprehensible to you, please leave the installation up to your system administrator or up to an expert in this field.

1. Create the directory C:\xSpider on your hard disk (using the operating system tools, such as the Windows Explorer, WindowsCommander etc.).

2. Copy all files from the directory \xSpider_SETUP\CUSTOM located on the installation CD-ROM into this newly created directory.

3. Run the program UnPack.BAT in the directory on your hard disk - the customer installation of the xSpider program will be unpacked.

4. Create a shortcut icon for the xSpider software on the desktop and a new item in the section Start-Programs. Create a shortcut icon for the program on the desktop (using the operating system tools).

5. Run the program by double-clicking the icon created in the previous step. If it is not possible to start the program, copy the files from the directory \xSpider_SETUP\WinSys on the installation CD-ROM to your Windows system directory, usually located at C:\Windows\System32 (Attention - newer versions of these libraries, which can already exist there in Windows, may not be overwritten !!).

6. Run the program and enter the licence data (see Chap. 9.1).

8.3 Installation backup Some files can be modified from time to time when using the program. This concerns files with the program configuration, user databases etc. It is desirable to back up these files:

File Comment From

version xSpider\Spider.INI Program configuration 1.0 xSpider\DATA\... User-defined databases of components (motors, generators,

transformers, cables, …) 1.0

Full installation backup: A precondition allowing you to perform the backup of the existing installation is the presence of the RAR.EXE packing program in the program root directory. RAR is not included in the standard installation, however, it is a shareware which can be downloaded from the Internet (e.g. at WWW.RAR.CZ) and used further on payment of the copyright fee.

1. Copy RAR.EXE to the superstructure root directory (typically C:\xSpider). 2. Run PACK.BAT from the program root directory (typically C:\xSpider). Click on the

Start button and select Run. A dialogue panel will open, in which you type the following text in the Open field: C:\xSpider\PACK.BAT (where C:\xSpider is the path to the program root directory). Click OK.

3. The program will be packed. Archive file Spider.RAR will be created in the program root directory. Backup this file together with UNRAR.EXE and UnPack.BAT to CD.

4. By using UnPack.BAT, you can unpack the archive file again.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


8.4 Software update from website As an integral part, xSpider includes the so-called Updater, a software to check the availability of new versions on the Moeller website. Its launch is offered automatically at regular intervals when you start up xSpider.

When the user agrees to launch the Updater, the software will automatically connect to the Moeller website and check the availability of a new xSpider version. If a new version is available, it will be downloaded and installed automatically. An Internet connection is a pre-condition for this function. Notes:

The check interval for availability of new versions on the Moeller website can be defined in the Options function under the System tab (see Chap. 21.1).

The date of the last check for availability of new versions on the Moeller website can be determined in Options under the Licence tab (see Chap. 21.6).

The Updater application to check the availability of new versions on the Moeller website can be launched at any time by using the Software Update from Website function from the Help drop-down menu.

8.5 Software update from directory If no Internet connection is available, it is possible to ask the software provider to have the update files sent in another way, and subsequently to update the software from directory.

1. Ask the software provider to have the update files sent to you, e.g. on a CD-ROM by postal service (there are two files for every update: control file *.XML and data file *.ZIP).

2. Load your update files to an auxiliary directory on the hard disk. All update files issued for the given software version must be present in the directory (it is not sufficient to have only the last issued update).

3. Launch xSpider. 4. Select Software Update from Directory from the Help drop-

down menu. 5. A dialogue panel will subsequently open (similar to the Open

function – see Chap. 20.2), in which you select the update control file (with extension *.XML) and click Open.

6. xSpider will be closed and Updater will be launched to update your installation.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


9. Launching xSpider _______________________________________________ If you have installed xSpider on your computer successfully in accordance with the procedure described in chapter 8, you can proceed with the program running.

9.1 First launching

1. Click on the Start button and follow the menu according to the items Programs - xSpider - xSpider. It is also possible to start the program simply by double clicking on the program’s icon on the desktop.

1. A dialogue panel with the Licence Agreement text will be displayed.

If you agree with the text shown above, click on the I Agree button. By doing so, you undertake to respect all provisions of the Licence Agreement. If you do not agree with the Licence Agreement, the program cannot be run. The wording of the Licence Agreement can be also viewed at any later point in time by using the function About xSpider (see Chap. 23).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2. As the next step, a dialogue panel will open requesting the entry of licence data:

Enter the required data specified in your licence or contact your software provider and ask him to provide you with the required licence data. Please pay special attention to filling out all items carefully, in particular the correct entry of licence expiration date and the licence number. The program will not be launched when incorrect values have been entered.

4. In case all data were filled in properly, the program will now be launched. The system remembers the licence conditions and does not request their entry with another start of the program. The licence data can be changed additionally at a later point in time by using the Options function (see Chap. 21.6). You can also view the licence data by using the function About xSpider (see Chap. 23).

5. After the program startup, the Tip of the Day window is displayed automatically, providing you with suggestions for working with the program. Please read the Tip for this startup and close the dialogue panel by clicking Close. The program is ready for use.

9.2 Second and any other launching

1. Click on the Start button and follow the menu according to the items Programs - xSpider - xSpider. If you have created a shortcut icon for the program at the desktop, you can simply run the program by double-clicking this icon.

2. The system checks the licence validity and, provided everything is correct, launches the program.

3. After the program startup, the Tip of the Day window is displayed automatically, providing you with suggestions for working with the program. Please read the Tip for this startup and close the dialogue panel by clicking Close. The program is ready for use.

Notes:

If you want to open a new project now, click on the icon New Project (see Chap. 20.3). If you want to open one of the demonstrational examples, click on the icon Open Demo

(see Chap. 20.2.1). Demos can be used as an initial point to solve a specific problem. If you want to continue in editing a network project you have already created and saved

previously, open this file now by clicking the icon Open Project (see Chap. 20.2). Showing of the Tip of the Day window at program startup can be overridden. It is also

possible to look through all the tips one by one (for more details see Chap. 22.1).

The specific provider address depends on the national version of your software.

Customer identification data. At least one character must be entered in every field.

Licence expiration date. It must be filled in very carefully according to the data provided by the software provider.

Licence number. It must be filled in very carefully according to the data provided by your software provider.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


If the following message appears after the program startup:

it means that your software lifetime has expired. Please contact your xSpider system provider to obtain new version of the software (or you can visit the website of the program provider, where you can download new version of the software).


it means that your licence has expired. Please contact your xSpider system provider if he can give you a new licence number (or possibly visit the website of the program provider where you can re-register your software online together with obtaining a new licence number, or download an update for the program, as the case may be). Then click Yes and enter the new licence data in the dialogue panel identical to the one used during the first initialization (see Chap. 9.1).


it means that the file Spider.INI containing the licence data has been corrupted. Click Yes and enter the new licence data in the dialogue panel identical to the one used during the first initialization (see Chap. 9.1). If difficulties persist, contact your xSpider system provider.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


10. Introduction to the xSpider software _______________________________________________

10.1 Main screen and program operation After launching the program (see Chap. 9.1, 9.2), the main screen is activated. The program uses the MDI user interface (Multiple Display Interface) allowing parallel processing of several network projects (similarly to the MS Word text editor, for instance, allowing parallel editing of several documents). A new project is activated automatically upon the program startup. You can commence to work with the program in one of the following ways:

Start creating the topology of a new network or set up another new network project by clicking the icon New Project (see Chap. 20.3),

Open one of the demonstrational examples by clicking the icon Open Demo (see Chap. 20.2.1),

Open an already existing network project and continue in its editing after clicking the icon Open Project (see Chap. 20.2),

Use some of the independent modules for working with the tripping characteristics (see Chap. 15) or for administration of user databases (see Chap. 16).

Main screen of the program - no project is activated:

Tools for handling the main program window (minimize, maximize, close window).

Status bar, information about the currently performed operation

Current date and time NumLock key state

Activation of the user database administration module

CapsLock key state

Activation of the tripping characteristics module

Opening an existing network project for further editing Creating a new network project

Window area for network projects

By dragging the edges, you can modify the

dimensions of the main program window

Opening a demo example for further editing

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Main screen of the program - the window with the network project is maximized:

Main screen of the program - two parallel opened projects:

Tools for handling the main program window (minimize, maximize, close window).

Tools for arranging the particular project windows on the main screen.

File name for the currently edited project.

Currently edited project (active project) – the top blue band. All functions relate to this project.

Non-active project – the top grey band.

The project window dimensions can be

changed by dragging its edges

Tools for handling the project window (minimize, maximize, close window).

You can change the project window position within the main screen by dragging the top band.

File name for the currently edited project.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The functions controlling the arrangement of the individual windows with projects in the main screen are located in the Window drop-down menu (the maximum of 10 windows with different projects can be opened simultaneously):

10.2 Running program functions

The individual program functions can be launched either by selecting the appropriate item from the drop-down menu (includes all program functions) or by clicking on the icon in the tool bar (includes only the most important functions). Launching of functions by means of the icons is preferred in this manual.

The last called function and the frequently used functions for Zoom view control can be launched from the context menu (pop-up menu), which is displayed after clicking your right mouse button in the graphics area of the window showing the project.

Keyboard shortcuts:

F1 Help (see Chap. 22) Ctrl+N New project (see Chap. 20.3) F3 Group (see Chap. 11.14) Ctrl+O Open project (see Chap. 20.2) F4 Calculation (see Chap. 14) Ctrl+S Save project (see Chap. 20.1) F5 Tripping characteristics (see Chap. 15) Ctrl+E Export (see Chap. 19) F6 Database (see Chap. 16) Ctrl+P Print (see Chap. 18) F7 Grid (see Chap. 11.16) Ctrl+Z Undo (see Chap. 10.3) F8 Ortho (see Chap. 11.16) Ctrl+Y Redo (see Chap. 10.3) F9 Step (see Chap. 11.16) Ctrl+F Find (see Chap. 12.7) Ctrl+X Cut to clipboard (see Chap. 12.6.1) Ctrl+C Copy to clipboard (see Chap. 12.6.2) Ctrl+V Paste from clipboard (see Chap. 12.6.3)

Arrange windows as a cascade:

Tile windows horizontally:

Tile windows vertically:

List of all open windows with network projects. By clicking on an item, the respective window becomes current.

Identification of the current window.

Arrange icons of the minimized windows in the bottom part of the basic screen.

Close windows with the currently edited project (similarly to clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the window).

Close all open project windows – setting the default state just like at the program startup.

Name of the last called function (here insertion of the Generator component). By selecting this item, the last called function will be activated again.

Functions for view control (zoom) (see Chap. 13).

Regenerate graphics display (see Chap. 13.1).

Context menu activated by the right mouse button.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


10.3 Undo, Redo The effect of all program functions (with the exception of image change carried out by the Zoom functions) can be cancelled (undone) one by one as they have been called by clicking the Undo icon. The program remembers all steps carried out from the beginning of the network project editing. Use the Undo function carefully since some operations do not have any direct visual implications for the wiring diagram (e.g. a change in the line parameters). The effect of the last performed Undo function can be restored by clicking the Redo icon. Only one single Undo step can be restored.

10.4 Method of program application When designing a network, the first step consists in drawing the wiring diagram (topology). The network wiring diagram is defined by combining the particular components (power sources, transformers, circuit lines, switching devices, protective devices, loads, compensation units) together in the graphics. Free graphics (lines, circles, text, …) can be added into the drawing. The software is intended for design of networks, which are operated as TN/IT/TT networks of various voltage systems. Thus the first step, prior to commencing the design of a new network, is selection of the network type and the voltage system (see Chap. 11.1). There are 2 types of components available in general when designing the wiring diagram:

Inserted components, i.e. introduced components, the parameters of which are preset and cannot be configured within the program (power sources, transformers, loads, motors, compensation units),

User-defined components, i.e. such components, the parameters of which are subject to investigation and optimization (lines - cables, busbar systems; protective devices - circuit breakers, fuses, switching components - disconnectors).

The entry of parameters for the user-defined components depends on the mode in which the program is operating. The following basic modes are available:

Design mode, i.e. the parameters of the user-defined components, where required so by the user, will be automatically determined and set in such manner as to ensure compliance with the safety requirements; however, the proposed design solution must not be optimal;

Control mode, i.e. parameters of all components (user-defined as well as inserted) are set by the user based on his/her previous experience; the calculation is followed by a check of the criteria for safe operation of the network. The user will evaluate the results and may subsequently carry out some optimization adjustments to the design.

Recommended work flow in the design mode:

1. Drawing of the network wiring diagram (topology) by combining the particular components in the graphics together.

Precise parameters of the inserted components must be entered (possibility of selecting the components from databases).

Parameters of the user-defined components must not be entered, but the Dimension automatically switch must be activated for every component. Using the Options

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


function under the Diagram tab, it is possible to define that the AutoDimension switch be automatically enabled by default when a component is inserted in the wiring diagram; for more details see Chap. 21.2.

Such user-defined components can also exist within the network, which have already been determined (by their selection from the database) and their dimensioning is not required - the Dimension automatically switch must be disabled for these components.

For more details see Chap. 11.2 - 11.14, 12.1.1. 2. Setting the automatic dimensioning parameters by using the Options function: to determine

the default standard for conductors (material, insulation), determine the preferences for circuit-breaker product series, etc. For more details see Chap. 21.5.

3. Launching the calculation of the automatic dimensioning by using the Calculation function. A complex check of the entire network is carried out after performing the calculation and the results are displayed (see Chap. 14.1).

4. Design editing or optimization, as the case may be, handling of collisions and error states (the automatic dimensioning mode solves standard cases so that they are in compliance from the safety point of view; however, it performs no optimization and does not take the technical feasibility of the design into account). For more details see Chap. 11, 12.

5. Print of the design results - the functions Print (see Chap. 18), or Export (see Chap. 19). Recommended work flow in the control mode:

1. Drawing of the network wiring diagram (topology) by combining the particular components in the graphics together (some of the demos supplied with the program can be used as an initial point).

Precise parameters of the inserted components must be entered.

Precise parameters of the user-defined components must be entered; the Dimension automatically switch must be disabled.

For more details see Chap. 11.2 - 11.14, 12.1.1. 2. Design of network behavior in operating state and in case of overload: calculation of Voltage

drops and load distribution by using the Calculation function. This step is followed by checks of the calculated parameters - whether the requirements of applicable standards are met. For more details see Chap. 14.3.

3. Design editing and repeating step 2 so long until all components comply. It is suitable to use the module for Tripping characteristics to assess the overload protection of cables (for more details see Chap. 15).

4. Design of network behavior at the maximum short circuit (resistance of network components to short-circuit currents): execution of the Check the entire network calculation: 3-phase symmetric short circuit by using the Calculation function. This step is followed by checks of the calculated parameters - whether the requirements of applicable standards are met. For more details see Chap. 14.4.

5. Design editing and repeating step 4 so long until all components comply. When designing only a part of the network, it is possible to use the calculation of Short-circuit currents: 3-phase symmetric short circuit - short circuit only in a single selected network node. For more details see Chap. 14.4.

6. Design of network behavior at the minimum short circuit (check for the fault disconnection time from the power source): execution of the Check the entire network calculation: 1-phase asymmetric short circuit by using the Calculation function. This step is followed by

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


checks of the calculated parameters - whether the requirements of applicable standards are met. For more details see Chap. 14.4.

7. Design editing and repeating step 6 so long until all components comply. When designing only a part of the network, it is possible to use the calculation of Short-circuit currents: 1-phase asymmetric short circuit - short circuit only in a single selected network node. For more details see Chap. 14.4.

8. Selectivity assessment by means of the module for Tripping characteristics (for more details see Chap. 15), or by means of a special Selectivity function (selectivity comparison between two circuit-breakers based on selectivity tables specified in the catalogue, for more details see Chap. 14.4.2).

9. Assessment of network behavior in various operating states - possibility of disconnecting individual lines (required in case of meshed networks supplied from several power sources, such as networks within the health care sector).

10. Print of the design results - the functions Print (see Chap. 18), or Export (see Chap. 19). Note: the sequence of the particular steps in the control mode can be modified as desired; the process specified above is only the recommended procedure. For details regarding the theory of designing and dimensioning of low-voltage networks see Chap. 1 - 4.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11. Network Wiring Diagram (Topology) _______________________________________________ When designing a network, the first step consists in drawing the wiring diagram (topology). The network wiring diagram is defined by combining the particular components in the graphics together. Free graphics can be added into the drawing. The following components can be used within the program:

Supply network

Inserted component, see Chap. 11.2

Generator


Transformer


Switchboard trunk - logical network branching (busbars, terminal blocks etc.), component with negligible impedance


Line - enclosed busbar distribution system

User-defined component, see Chap. 11.6

Line - cable User-defined

component, see Chap. 11.7

Switch disconnector (the operating state of the switching component can be set to: on/off, thus allowing disconnection of the particular network lines)


Circuit-breaker (the operating state of the circuit-protection component can be set to: on/off, thus allowing disconnection of the particular network lines)


Fuse (the operating state of the circuit-protection component can be set to: on/off, thus allowing disconnection of the particular network lines)


Motor


Load


Compensation unit


Group (insertion of typical component groups - supply, motor outlet with circuit breaker, general outlet with circuit breaker and fuse, …)

Group of user-defined and inserted comps, see Chap. 11.14

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Free graphics - basic geometric figures (line, circle, rectangle, text)


11.1 Network type and voltage system Prior to beginning to draw the wiring diagram, it is necessary to set the network type (TN, IT, or TT) and the voltage system. The network type has an influence on the calculation of asymmetric short circuits, while the voltage system influences currents in the network and the breaking capacities of circuit-protection components. When inserting a component into the wiring diagram, a check is carried out as to whether the component is suitable for the selected network voltage. The network type and voltage system can be changed at any later point in time by the same function, however, such change usually gives rise the need to modify a number of components in the wiring diagram. The initial network type and voltage system for a new project can be set in the Options under the Calculation tab (see Chap. 21.4).

1. In the Tools drop-down menu, select the item Network: type, voltage system. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the network type and the voltage system as

necessary:

3. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The new values set will be saved in the network

project and can be changed any time by using the same function again. The currently set values are shown under the description field (title block) in the network project:

Set the network type by selecting one of the offered options.

Set the voltage system by selecting one of the standard voltage systems defined in the regulations. If you select „Other“, you can specify any other system by defining the delta voltage and the phase voltage.

Please pay attention to this information.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11.2 Supply network This component represents supergrid network supplying power into the designed circuit. It can be a high-voltage network feeding the transformer, or a low-voltage network. Every network must include at least one power supply unit. The program allows designing of networks supplied from one or more power sources. In addition to the supply network, power supply can be also provided from a generator (see Chap. 11.3).

1. Click on the Supply network icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed upwards above the insertion point).

2. Click the symbol position in the graphics area of the project window. The insertion point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area).

3. A dialogue panel will be subsequently opened, in which you enter all parameters defining the component (it is an inserted component, the precise parameters of which must always be entered):

Network type.

The tag identifying the component in the project, it must be unique within the entire project; the number in the tag automatically increases when inserting a new component.

Voltage system: phase/delta voltage.

Graphics tab – modification of the symbol position in the project, see Chap. 12.1.1.

Short-circuit power and short-circuit current are interconnected values, it is sufficient to enter one of them and the other one will be calculated automatically. Click on the question-mark icon to view a table of typical values for different cases of power supply networks. If you lack other data, you can use some of the values offered. Exact data can be requested from the power distribution company.

For filling of the particular items in the title block see Chap. 17.

The supply network voltage must correspond to the selected voltage system (see Chap. 11.1) (will be pre-filled automatically) and to the connected phases (delta voltage for 3-phase connections, phase voltage for 1-phase connections).

Specification of the connected phase: either a 3-phase connection or one specific phase.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The component will be inserted in the network design.

Notes:

Supply network can be connected directly to a transformer or to switchboard trunks.

Supply network can be connected by cable (the ratios between the supply network and the first switchboard must be taken into account).

In case of parallel feed from several power supply units into one switchboard, all supply networks must be connected by cable.

The short-circuit power values indicated for the different cases of power supply networks are indicative only. Please contact the local power distribution company to obtain exact values.

The short-circuit power for 1-phase short-circuit in a 3-phase network does not have to be entered, in particular, for high-voltage networks. It should always be entered for 3-phase low-voltage networks. If it is not entered, the calculation of asymmetric short-circuits will be less precise.

Short-circuit power for 1-phase short-circuit does not have to be entered (primarily with high-voltage networks); if it is not entered, the calculation of asymmetric short-circuits will be less accurate. Click on the question-mark icon to view information text with user recommendation.

Instead of the short-circuit power, you can enter the equivalent impedance components directly (will be used e.g. in case of IT networks supplied from a TN supply network). After enabling the switch, the respective items will become accessible.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Effective impedance components obtained through measurement or through independent calculation for the supply network can be entered instead of the short-circuit power. This can become useful, for instance, in case of IT networks (such as health-care installations) powered from a TN supply network – the effective impedance components can be obtained through independent calculation for the TN supply network.

11.3 Generator This component represents a generator (typically a standby power source) supplying power into the designed circuit. The program allows designing of networks supplied from one or more power sources. In addition to the generator, power supply can be also provided from supply networks (see Chap. 11.2).

1. Click on the Generator icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed upwards above the insertion point).

2. Click the symbol position in the graphic area of the project window. The insertion point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area).

3. A dialogue panel will be subsequently opened, in which you enter all parameters defining the component (it is an inserted component, the precise parameters of which must always be entered). As an integral part, the program includes a database of standard generators with the option of adding user-defined types. The database is activated by clicking the Database button. For description of the database explorer see Chap. 16.1.

Correct Incorrect

HV side conditions immediately in front of the transformer can be taken into account. (high-voltage cables and protective devices are not included in the software databases).

Connection of two parallel supply networks into a single

distribution board:

Supply from HV networks:

Supply from LV networks:

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The component will be inserted in the network

design. Notes:

It is suitable to connect the generator by line with a circuit breaker. The program enables the user to change the operating state of the circuit breaker between ON-OFF, therefore it is possible to analyze various network situations (with supply from a generator or with supply from a supply network).

The program allows calculation of electrically remote short circuits only - it is not possible to calculate the short circuit directly on the generator terminals.

11.4 Transformer This component represents either a distribution transformer dividing the high-voltage supply network and the designed low-voltage network, or a protective isolation transformer used to build IT networks (e.g. for medical isolated system).



Component parameter setting by selection from the database; for database operation see 16.1.

„Manual“ entry of component parameters, or local editing of the particular values taken over from the database, as the case may be (without reverse impact on the database).

Supply from generator:Generator disconnected:

Correct Incorrect

Incorrect connection of generator and network directly to the distribution board.

Specification of the connected phase.


_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1. Click on the Transformer icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).


3. A dialogue panel will be subsequently opened, in which you enter all parameters defining the component (it is an inserted component, the precise parameters of which must always be entered). As an integral part, the program includes a database of standard transformers with the option of adding user-defined types. The database is activated by clicking the Database button. For description of the database explorer see Chap. 16.1.


Notes:

With its high-voltage end, the transformer can be connected either to a supply network or to a cable.

With its low-voltage end, the transformer can be connected only to a cable or a busbar system. The transformer cannot be connected directly to a „Switchboard trunk“ or a "Circuit breaker“ type component.

The computational node is always located on the transformer’s low-voltage side; calculation results shown for the transformer always relate to the low-voltage side.

Primary voltage Ur1 must match the voltage of the supergrid supply network precisely. Secondary voltage Ur2 must correspond to the selected voltage system (see Chap. 11.1) and the connected phases (delta voltage for 3-phase connection; phase voltage for 1-phase connection).



Component parameter setting by selection from the database; for database operation see 16.1.



Calculation of the transformer nominal current

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11.5 Switchboard trunk Switchboard trunks represent arbitrary logical network branching implemented, for instance, as a busbar or terminal block, interconnecting bar etc. It is a component having a negligible impedance. Network branching is possible only at this component. The component may not be an end-component in the network - at least two additional components must be connected to it.

1. Click on the Switchboard trunk icon. The mouse pointer will change to a cross-hair. 2. Click the first point of the line representing the trunk component in the diagram. The

clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. Now drag the radius vector - the line representing the switchboard trunk component in the

diagram. The line can be horizontal only. Drawing from the left to the right is presumed. Click the end point of the line representing the trunk component in the diagram. The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area) in such a way to ensure that the line is parallel to the X axis.

4. A dialogue panel will be subsequently opened, in which you enter all parameters defining the component (it is an inserted component, the precise parameters of which must always be entered).

Correct Correct Correct Incorrect Incorrect


Graphics tab – modification of the position and size of the line representing switchboard trunk component in the project, see Chap. 12.1.1.

Calculation results relate to the LV side of the transformer.

The HV side conditions immediately in front of the transformer can be taken into account. (high-voltage cables and protective devices are not included in the software databases)

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



design. Notes:

Simultaneous factor – defines the simultaneousness of consumptions from the node. Example: there are 3 outlets connected to a node = 3 loads with a nominal current of 100A, 500A, 1000A, and a simultaneous factor was defined as Ks=0.5; the current flowing to the node is 0.5x(100+500+1000) = 800A.

The simultaneous factor is taken into account only with radial networks. The simultaneous factor is ignored with meshed networks.

Blue line representing the switchboard trunk component in the diagram. The line position and length can be changed at a later point intime – see Chap. 12.5. The line can be horizontal only.

2nd click the end point (drawing from the left to the right is anticipated). The line length must exceed the distance between two adjacent dots in the grid.

1st click the initial point.

Switchboard trunk tag. Placed automatically near the first clicked point, its position can changed at a later point in time – see Chap 12.5.



The maximum voltage drop allowed in this network node in relation to the power source voltage; you can select from values prescribed by the standard (see Chap. 4.1), or enter any arbitrary value.

Simultaneous factor – defines the simultaneousness of consumptions from the node (ratio between the number of devices in operation and the total number of devices).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11.6 Line - enclosed busbar distribution system This component represents a line executed as an enclosed busbar distribution system. Power is transferred from the initial point to the end point. Taps or network branching are not possible along the component (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5). Note: The function is not available from the 2.2 version.

1. Click on the Line - Busbar Systems icon. The mouse pointer will change to a cross-hair. 2. Click the first point of the line representing the line component in the diagram. The

clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. Now drag the radius vector - the line representing the line component in the diagram. The line

can be horizontal or vertical only. Drawing from the left to the right and from the top to the bottom is presumed. Click the line breakpoint. The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area) in such a way to ensure that the line is parallel to the X axis or to the Y axis.

4. Repeat step 3 until you draw the entire line shape (the line shape can include up to 5 breakpoints). Every line section must exceed the distance between two adjacent grid dots. The line must include at least two points (the beginning and the end) clicked by the left mouse button.

5. Click the right mouse button to complete the definition of the line shape. 6. A dialogue panel will open subsequently, in which you enter all parameters defining the

component. It is a user-defined component, the parameters of which can be, but do not have to be entered.

If you are using the program in the design mode, enter only the line length and the method of installation (or, where relevant, also the conductor material and design under the Details tab), and activate the Dimension automatically switch. Other parameters do not have to be entered, they will be added automatically after running the calculation for Cable and circuit-protection dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1).

Correct branching on the switchboard trunk:

Inadmissible branching outside of the

switchboard trunk: component

Inadmissible network branching on the HV side:

Correct Incorrect Incorrect

At least 2 additional components must be connected to every switchboard trunk.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Note: Using the Digram tab under the Options function, it is possible to define that the switch be automatically enabled by default when a component is inserted in the wiring diagram (see Chap. 21.2).

If you are using the program in the control mode, enter only the line length, the method of installation and the number of parallel lines. Then click on the Database button and select the desired busbar system (for database explorer operation see Chap. 16.1.). The Dimension automatically switch must be disabled.


Graphics tab – modification of the position and size of the line representing line component in the project, see Chap. 12.1.1.

Cable length and the method of installation must be always specified regardless of the status of the „Dimension automatically“ switch; the method of installation limits the current-carrying capacity of the line , it has no effect on some types of busbar systems.

The ambient temperature cannot be changed; operation under higher temperatures is not expected.

Setting of component parameters by selection from the database; for database control see Chap. 16.1.

Automatic dimensioning – when it is enabled, the component parameters will be set automatically after running the calculation called Cable and protective device dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1); otherwise the values specified here shall apply.

Number of parallel lines must be set if the program is used in the control mode. Will be determined automatically in case of automatic dimensioning.


The maximum allowed voltage drop in this line; it is possible to select from values prescribed by the standard (see Chap. 4.1), or to enter any arbitrary value.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



design. Notes:

The line may not be an end-component in the network - at least one additional component must be connected to every end of the line. Taps or network branching are not possible along the component (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5).

1st point – beginning of the line (left-button click).

4th point – end of the line – right-click after clicking this point to end the line drawing mode.

The particular parameters of the busbar distribution system are taken over from the database and cannot be edited locally.

2nd point – breakpoint in the line (left-button click).

3rd point - breakpoint in the line (left-button click).

The line tag is placed automatically at the first clicked point (beginning of the line), its position can be changed at a later point in time – see Chap 12.5.

A protective device is at the beginning of the line (a circuit breaker in this case).

A motor is connected to the end of the line in this case.

Line route – enclosed busbar distribution system – marked with dark green color in the diagram.

Rated voltage indicates the maximum possible voltage for which the component can be used.

The conductor material and design can be defined – only the values set here will, in such case, be respected in automatic dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1). If nothing is defined here, the default values from the Options – AutoDimensioning tab will be used in automatic dimensioning.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11.7 Line - cable This component represents a line executed as a cable, a group of single-core cables or an overhead line. Power is transferred from the initial point to the end point. Taps or network branching are not possible along the component (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5).

1. Click on the Line - Cable icon. The mouse pointer will change to a cross-hair. 2. Click the first point of the line representing the line component in the diagram. The

clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. Now drag the radius vector - the line representing the line component in the diagram. The line

can be horizontal or vertical only. Drawing from the left to the right and from the top to the bottom is presumed. Click the line breakpoint. The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area) in such a way to ensure that the line is parallel to the X axis or to the Y axis.

4. Repeat step 3 until you draw the entire line shape (the line shape can include up to 5 breakpoints). Every line section must exceed the distance between two adjacent grid dots. The line must include at least two points (the beginning and the end) clicked by the left mouse button.

5. Click the right mouse button to complete the definition of the line shape. 6. A dialogue panel will open subsequently, in which you enter all parameters defining the

component. It is a user-defined component, the parameters of which can be, but do not have to be entered.

If you are using the program in the design mode, enter only the line length, the method of installation and the ambient temperature (after clicking on Define installation); and activate the Dimension automatically switch. Other parameters do not have to be entered, they will be added automatically after running the calculation for Cable and circuit-protection dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1).

If you are using the program in the control mode, enter only the line length, the method of installation and the ambient temperature (after clicking on Define installation) as well as the number of parallel lines. Then click on the Database button and select the desired cable (for database explorer operation see Chap. 16.1.). The Dimension automatically switch must be disabled.

Line is not protected. Nothing is connected to the end of the line.

Inadmissible network branching outside of the switchboard trunk.

Incorrect Incorrect

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The tag identifying the component in the project, it must be unique within the entire project.

Graphics tab – modification of the position and size of the line representing cable component in the project, see Chap. 12.1.1.

Cable length and the method of installation must be always specified regardless of the status of the „Dimension automatically“ switch; the method of installation limits the cable current-carrying capacity.



The number of parallel lines must be set if the program is used in the control mode.

Calculation and display of the cable current-carrying capacity with respect to the specified installation, cable grouping and ambient


The maximum voltage drop allowed in this line - it is possible to select one of the values prescribed by the standard (see Chap. 4.1), or to enter any desired value.

See text below.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The method of installation and the ambient temperature limit the cable current-carrying capacity. Precise setting is possible after clicking on Define installation:

Select the basic installation method to be applied for the cable according to IEC 60364-5-523 and the arrangement in case of cable grouping (various grouping arrangements are available for different installation; the impact of the grouping will appear in case of more parallel lines or in case the number of other circuits within the grouping is higher than zero).

The number of other circuits within the grouping is the number of other cables located in the grouping together with the designed circuit. The total number of circuits within the grouping is determined by the number of parallel lines in the designed circuit + the number of other circuits. In case the cable is lead separately, leave the value 0.

As for the ambient temperature, the maximum temperature of ambient air or of the surrounding soil must be entered, which can reasonably occur during the operation of the equipment. For more details see the theoretical introduction - Chap. 2.2. The specific thermal resistance of ground can be also set for the D-type installation.

The user coefficient allows you to take other factors into account or to solve situations not described in the IEC standards. By means of this coefficient, it is possible to increase or reduce the cable current-carrying capacity in any way. The use of this coefficient is in the sole responsibility of the user.

Selection of the basic method of installation according to IEC 60364-5-523 (the description column can be extended by dragging the edges of the dialogue panel, thus extending it). The figure on the right represents the selected basic method of installation.

Depiction of the selected basic method of installation.

Depiction of the grouping in case of several circuits being grouped together.

Selection of the grouping method in case of several circuits grouped together.

The dialogue panel dimensions can be changed by dragging its edges.

Calculation of the coefficient taking into account the grouping, ambient temperature and the user coefficient; calculation of the cable current-carrying capacity. The calculation is performed only when the cable has already been defined.

Information message in case the cable current-carrying capacity cannot be determined with respect to the method of installation.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The programs solves only situations described in IEC 60364-5-523. However, it can be a very useful tool also in those cases which are not specifically stated in the standard, because it is possible to find a close alternative and, on its basis, estimate the situation we need to solve or to correct it with the user coefficient, as the case may be.

If a cable has already been selected, a continuous coefficient calculation is being carried out taking into account the grouping, ambient temperature and the user coefficient, as well as calculation of the cable current-carrying capacity.

In case you select a combination of installation/temperature/cross-section/material, which is not included in IEC 60364-5-523, the program will alert you on this fact. The solution typically consists in using a higher number of parallel lines with smaller cross-section or in using the user coefficient. For more details see the theoretical intro - chap. 2.2.

After closing the dialogue panel by clicking OK, the values set will be displayed within the Method of installation section. The actual current-carrying capacity of the cable can be subsequently viewed after clicking the Current-carrying capacity button.

The number of wires must correspond to the number of connected phases (3-phase connection: 4 and more wires, 1-phase connection: 2 or 3 wires).

The maximum voltage drop allowed in this line - it is possible to select one of the values prescribed by the standard (see Chap. 4.1), or to enter any desired value. The calculation of voltage drops is followed by a check whether the calculated drop does not exceed the limit value set here. As standard, the value determined by the function in the Options under the Calculation tab is offered as the default value for a new inserted component.

Rated voltage indicates the maximum voltage possible, for which the component can be used.

User coefficient. It is specified only if it doesn’t equal one.

Ambient temperature.

The selected basic method of installation (marking + description). Specified always.

Total number of circuits in the grouping (number of parallel lines of the designed circuit + number of additional circuits), description of the grouping arrangement. Specified, if the total number of circuits in the grouping exceeds one.

The text does not have to be shown in full, you can move through the text by means of the scroll bar in the right part of the window.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Notes:

The line may not be an end-component in the network - at least one additional component must be connected to every end of the line. Taps or network branching are not possible along the component (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5).

Item concerning Nominal current of cable to be installed in air, which is entered under the Details tab. The value entered here will be used in case of any changes to the data in this item as well as for user-defined cables. The user is responsible for the correctness of the entered value. In other cases (for cables from the master database), the nominal current of the cable will be calculated from tables defined by the relevant standard, based on the conductor material and insulation.

Using the Digram tab under the Options function, it is possible to define that the Dimension automatically switch be automatically enabled by default when a component is inserted in the wiring diagram (see Chap. 21.2).

If the items for Conductor material and Core insulation are defined under the Details tab, the values entered here will be respected during automatic dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1). If nothing is entered here, the default values from the Options – AutoDimensioning tab will be used in automatic dimensioning (see Chap. 25.1). Both aluminium and copper cables can be automatically dimensioned simultaneously within a single project if these items are set appropriately.

The particular cable parameters are usually taken over from the database; their local editing is possible here (without the retrospective effect on the database). The number of conductors must correspond to the number of the connected phases (3-phase connection: 4 and more conductors; 1-phase connection: 2 or 3 conductors).

Rated voltage indicates the maximum possible voltage for which the component can be used.

Nominal current of the cable to be installed in air. For cables from the parent database, the value is calculated from the tables defined by the standard, based on the conductor material and the insulation. In case of user-defined cables or in case of any changes made to the data in this field, the value entered here will be used. This gives the possibility to define cables with a higher current-carrying capacity than that indicated by the standard. The user is responsible for the correctness of the entered value.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11.8 Switch-disconnector The switch-disconnecting component is designed for disconnection of the individual network lines and monitoring of the network behavior under various operating states. It is used in situations where the use of a circuit-protection component is unnecessary. The switch-disconnector will not switch off the short circuit, but it must withstand the short-circuit current until the moment it is switched off. The rated current In and the short-time one-second withstand current Icw are checked during the calculations.

1. Click on the Switch-disconnector icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).


3. A dialogue panel will open subsequently, in which you enter all parameters defining the component. It is a user-defined component, the parameters of which can be, but do not have to be entered.

If you are using the program in the design mode, activate the Dimension automatically switch. Other parameters do not have to be entered, they will be added automatically after running the calculation for Cable and circuit-protection dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1).

Line is not protected. Nothing is connected to

the end of the line.

Inadmissible network branching outside of the switchboard trunk.

Incorrect Incorrect

1st point – beginning of the line (left-button click).

4th point – end of the line – right-click after clicking this point to end the line drawing mode.

2nd point – breakpoint in the line (left-button click).

3rd point - breakpoint in the line (left-button click).

The line tag is placed automatically at the first clicked point (beginning of the line), its position can be changed at a later point in time – see Chap 12.5.

A protective device is at the beginning of the line.

A motor is connected to the end of the line in this case.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Using the Digram tab under the Options function, it is possible to define that the Dimension automatically switch be automatically enabled by default when a component is inserted in the wiring diagram (see Chap. 21.2).

If you are using the program in the control mode, click on the Database button and select the desired switch-disconnector (for database explorer operation see Chap. 16.1). The Dimension automatically switch must be disabled.

The number of poles of the equipment must correspond to the number of connected phases.

Rated voltage indicates the maximum voltage possible, for which the component can be used. 4. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The component will be inserted in the network

design. Notes:

A line must always be connected to one side of the switch-disconnector (as with a circuit breaker, see Chap. 11.9).

11.9 Circuit breaker The circuit-breaker type protection component is used to protect lines. A circuit-protection component should be connected to one of the ends of every line. The operating state of the circuit-






Setting of the protective-device operating state to on/off; possibility to disconnect lines and monitor various operating states of the networks.

Specification of the connected phase: either 3-phase connection or a single specific phase.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


protection component can be set to: on/off, thus allowing disconnection of the particular network lines and monitoring of network behavior in different operating states.

1. Click on the Circuit breaker icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).


3. A dialogue panel will open subsequently, in which you enter all parameters defining the component. It is a user-defined component, the parameters of which can be, but do not have to be entered. If you are using the program in the design mode, activate the Dimension

automatically switch. Other parameters do not have to be entered, they will be added automatically after running the calculation for Cable and circuit-protection dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1). Note: Using the Digram tab under the Options function, it is possible to define that the Dimension automatically switch be automatically enabled by default when a component is inserted in the wiring diagram (see Chap. 21.2).

If you are using the program in the control mode, click on the Database button and select the desired circuit breaker (for database explorer operation see Chap. 16.1). The Dimension automatically switch must be disabled.


Graphics tab, see Chap. 12.1.1.




Specification, which of the parameters will be taken into account when checking the short-circuit current load: Operating breaking capacity Ics – the circuit breaker is able to disconnect this short-circuit current without damage repeatedly. Limit breaking capacity Icu – the circuit breaker is able to disconnect this short-circuit current, but can be damaged.


The tripping characteristic can be viewed by means of the Tripping Characteristics module (see Chap. 15).


The maximum disconnection time of the circuit breaker from the point of view of protection against indirect contact with exposed conductive parts.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




The switching capacity of some circuit-breaker types depends on the voltage of the network, in which the component is connected. When selecting the component from the database, the system will automatically select the switching capacity corresponding to the selected voltage system (see Chap. 11.1). Other values can be viewed after opening the full drop-down list (the voltage, to which the given value relates, is specified in the brackets). In case this value list is empty, the respective number applies for the full voltage range up to Un. As for local editing, any desired value can be entered. In such case, the entered value relates to the current Un

value.

The maximum disconnection time of the circuit breaker from the point of view of protection against dangerous voltage in dead parts - pursuant to IEC 60364-4-4 (see Chap. 3.7). From the list, select one of the values provided for by the standard or enter any number. Following the 1-phase short circuit calculation, a check is carried out as to whether the circuit breaker will switch off the failure faster, i.e. before the limit time set here. As standard, the value determined by the function in the Options under the Calculation tab is offered as the default value for a new inserted component.

In case the circuit breaker is equipped with adjustable releases, a modification of their settings is possible under the Releases tab. All control features of the releases are set to the maximum value by default.

With the module for Tripping characteristics (see Chap. 15), it is possible to view the tripping characteristics including the impact of the release settings (to assess the selectivity or overload protection).

Evaluation of selectivity can also be carried out using the special Selectivity function (selectivity comparison of two circuit-breakers based on selectivity tables specified in the catalogue, for more details see Chap. 14.4.2).


Release parameter setting. Only adjustable parameters are accessible depending on the circuit breaker type.

Specific value, for which the release is set.

The tripping characteristic (taking into account the release settings) can be viewed by means of the Tripping Characteristics module (see Chap. 15).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Notes:

A line must always be connected to one side of every circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker/fuse cascading is solved (the fuse serves as back-up protection for the circuit-breaker).

Circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker cascading is addressed – see Chap. 14.4.1.

11.10 Fuse The fuse type circuit-protection component is used to protect lines. A circuit-protection component should be connected to one of the ends of every line. The operating state of the circuit-protection component can be set to: on/off, thus allowing disconnection of the particular network lines and monitoring of network behavior in different operating states.

1. Click on the Fuse icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).


3. A dialogue panel will open subsequently, in which you enter all parameters defining the component. It is a user-defined component, the parameters of which can be, but do not have to be entered. If you are using the program in the design mode, activate the Dimension

automatically switch. Other parameters do not have to be entered, they will be added automatically after running the calculation for Cable and circuit-protection dimensioning (see Chap. 14.1).

Correct Incorrect

Correct design of bus connection:

Inadmissible connection of circuit breaker between buses:

Circuit breaker/fuse cascade:

A cable must be always present, even if with large cross-section and minimum length.

Circuit breaker on.

Circuit breaker off.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Note: Using the Digram tab under the Options function, it is possible to define that the Dimension automatically switch be automatically enabled by default when a component is inserted in the wiring diagram (see Chap. 21.2).

If you are using the program in the control mode, click on the Database button and select the desired fuse (for database explorer operation see Chap. 16.1). The Dimension automatically switch must be disabled.



The breaking capacity applies for the full voltage range up to Un.

The maximum disconnection time of the fuse from the point of view of protection against indirect contact with exposed conductive parts - pursuant to IEC 60364-4-41 (see Chap. 3.7). From the list, select one of the values provided for by the standard or enter any number. Following the 1-phase short circuit calculation, a check is carried out as to whether the fuse will switch off the failure faster, i.e. before the limit time set here. As standard, the value determined by the function in the Options under the Calculation tab is offered as the default value for a new inserted component.


design.



Setting of component parameters by selection from the database; for database control see Chap. 16.1



The tripping characteristic can be viewed by means of the Tripping Characteristics module (see Chap. 15)


Limiting characteristic will be applied when calculating 3-phase short circuits – determination of the limited short-circuit current behind the fuse.


The maximum disconnection time of the circuit breaker from the point of view of protection against indirect contact with exposed conductive parts.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Notes:

A line must always be connected to one side of the fuse (similarly to circuit breakers, see Chap. 11.9).

Circuit breaker/fuse cascading is solved (the fuse serves as back-up protection for the circuit-breaker).

11.11 Motor This component represents a rotary (motor) load consuming power from the designed circuit (typically an asynchronous motor). A typical feature of this load type appearing during short-circuits consists in supplying power into the short-circuited circuit, thus contributing to increase in the short-circuit current. It is an end-type network component, which must always be connected at the end of the line.

1. Click on the Motor icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed

downwards under the insertion point). 2. Click the symbol position in the graphic area of the project window. The insertion point

will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. A dialogue panel will be subsequently opened, in which you enter all parameters defining the

component (it is an inserted component, the precise parameters of which must always be entered). As an integral part, the program includes a database of standard motors with the option of adding user-defined types. The database is activated by clicking the Database button. For description of the database explorer see Chap. 16.1.

Rated voltage of the component must correspond to the number of connected phases (3-phase connection - delta voltage; 1-phase connection - phase voltage) and to the selected voltage system (see Chap. 11.1).






The utilization coefficient defines to what extent the motor is loaded during ordinary operation..

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The maximum voltage drop - the highest voltage drop allowed in this network node with respect to the power supply voltage; it is possible to select one of the values prescribed by the standard (see Chap. 4.1), or to enter any desired value. The calculation of voltage drops is followed by a check whether the calculated drop does not exceed the limit value set here. As standard, the value determined by the function in the Options under the Calculation tab is offered as the default value for a new inserted component.

The entered current and output values are checked for consistence. An error message is generated in case of any inconsistency. This message can be ignored if we need to design the network state at the moment of motor startup and if we temporarily increase the rated current up to the value of the starting current, or it can be ignored in case of a minor inconsistence caused by rounding.


design. Notes:

Motor is an end-type network component, which must always be connected at the end of the line.

Only one line can be connected to a motor (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5).

The utilization factor defines to what extent the motor is loaded during ordinary operation (the default value is 1 – the motor is loaded to 100%). Example: 7.5kW motor fitted in the project, with maximum 80% load during ordinary operation – utilization factor Ku=0.8. The utilization factor is taken into account in both radial and meshed networks.

11.12 Load This component represents a general stationary (non-motor) load consuming power from the designed circuit (typically lighting, heaters, socket circuits etc.). It is an end-type network component, which can always be connected at the end of the line or directly to switchboard trunks.

Incorrect connection of motors without any line used:

Correct connection of motors at the end of the line:

Correct Incorrect Incorrect Incorrect

Inadmissible network branching outside of the

switchboard trunk:

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1. Click on the Load icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).



Rated voltage of the component must correspond to the number of connected phases (3-phase connection - delta voltage; 1-phase connection - phase voltage) and to the selected voltage system (see Chap. 11.1).

The maximum voltage drop - the highest voltage drop allowed in this network node with respect to the power supply voltage; it is possible to select one of the values prescribed by the standard (see Chap. 4.1), or to enter any desired value. The calculation of voltage drops is followed by a check whether the calculated drop does not exceed the limit value set here. As standard, the value determined by the function in the Options under the Calculation tab is offered as the default value for a new inserted component.

The utilization factor defines to what extent a load is loaded during ordinary operation (the default value is 1 – the load is loaded to 100%). Example: a general load is constituted by a socket circuit composed of 10 sockets with 16A each. The nominal current of such load is In=10x16=160A; however, the simultaneous consumption is max. 10%. This means the utilization factor is Ku=0.1. The utilization factor is taken into account in both radial and meshed networks.


design.



Component parameter entry.

A load can be defined by means of the rated current or the rated input power. First of all the switch must be set depending on which of the parameters is known, and then specify the value in the field next to it. The other parameter will be calculated automatically.


The utilization coefficient defines to what extent the motor is loaded during ordinary operation.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Notes:

Load is an end-type network component, which can always be connected at the end of the line or directly to switchboard trunks.

Only one line can be connected to a load (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5).

11.13 Compensation This component represents a load constituted by compensation condenser. It is an end-type network component, which can always be connected at the end of the line or directly to switchboard trunks.

1. Click on the Compensation icon. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).



Incorrect load connection directly to

protective devices:

Correct load connection directly to busbars:

Correct load connection at the end of the line:

Correct Correct Incorrect Incorrect

Inadmissible network branching outside of the

switchboard trunk:



_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Rated voltage of the component must correspond to the number of connected phases (3-phase connection - delta voltage; 1-phase connection - phase voltage) and to the selected voltage system.

The connection of condensers must correspond to the number of connected phases (3-phase connection - star or delta connection; 1-phase connection - star connection).

The entered output and capacity values are checked for consistence. In case of minor inconsistence caused by rounding, it is possible to ignore the warning message.


design. Notes:

Compensation is an end-type network component, which can always be connected at the end of the line or directly to switchboard trunks (similarly to loads, see Chap. 11.12).

Only one line can be connected to a compensation (the „Switchboard trunk“ component is to be used for network branching - see Chap. 11.5). A line must be always present between a circuit-protection component and a compensation (similarly to loads, see Chap. 11.12).

After the calculation of the voltage drop and the load distribution, the power factor in the 3-phase network nodes formed by the „Switchboard trunk“ component. The program does not allow the user to enter the target power factor; the required compensation volume must be determined by trial and error through successive insertion of various-sized condensers. The possibility of changing the operating state of switching and circuit-protecting components can be used as an advantage for successive connection of the individual condensers.

11.14 Group The Group function allows insertion of typical groups of components forming a part of the wiring diagram. Therefore, a group of components comprising the power supply (network, transformer, cable, protection) or an outlet to the load (protection, cable, load) etc. can be created with a single mouse click.




_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1. Click on the Group icon. 2. In the subsequently opened dialogue panel, select the group of components to be

inserted (click on the image) and click Insert.

3. The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with

respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point). 4. Click the position of the group insertion point in the graphics area of the project window. The

insertion point was indicated with violet cross in the dialogue panel image. The insertion point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). The group of components will be inserted.

5. Repeat the previous step until you insert the required number of groups. 6. Click the right mouse button to exit the group insertion. 7. Now set the properties of the individual component groups. To go to the properties editing

mode as fast as possible, double-click on the respective component (see Chap. 12.1). Note:

The Group function allows you to insert only typical combinations of components. Any other combinations must be composed by separate insertion of the particular components (see Chap. 11.2-11.13).

In case of repeated occurrence of component groups, the parameters of which differ only very slightly (such as several motor outlets differing only in the cable length), it is more suitable to insert only one group, set the parameters of all its components and then copy this group (see Chap. 12.3).

Insertion of any arbitrary number of the selected group into the wiring diagram. Right click to exit the insertion mode.

Figure identifying the components included in the group and their connection.

The cross indicates the position of the group insertion point. The position of this point must be clicked in the graphic area of the project window.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


11.15 Free graphics The term „free graphics“ includes a group of functions allowing the user to add the basic graphical entities into the network wiring diagram, such as a line, rectangle, circle and text. In this manner it is possible, for instance, to add comments to the network wiring, separate the particular switchboards, indicate the power flow in different network operating states etc. The default properties of the free graphics (color, line thickness and type) are given by the program setting (see Chap. 21.3) and can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 12.1.2), just like the component’s position and dimensions. The functions for free graphics insertion are located in the Draw drop-down menu, or as icons in the tool bar.

11.15.1 Line

1. Click on the Line icon. 2. Click the initial point of the line (point B1). The clicked point will be

automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. Now drag the radius vector - a curve representing the future line. Click the end point of the

line (point B2). The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area).

4. The line is now inserted in the diagram. The default properties (color, line thickness and type) are given by the program setting (see Chap. 21.3) and can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 12.1.2), just like the component’s position and dimensions.

11.15.2 Rectangle

1. Click on the Rectangle icon. 2. Click one corner of the rectangle (point B1). The clicked point will be

automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. Now drag the shape representing the future rectangle. Click the opposite

corner of the rectangle (point B2). The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area).

4. The rectangle is now inserted in the diagram. The default properties (color, line thickness and type) are given by the program setting (see Chap. 21.3) and can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 12.1.2), just like the component’s position and dimensions.

11.15.3 Circle

1. Click on the Circle icon. 2. Click the center of the circle (point B1). The clicked point will be

automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. Now drag the shape representing the future circle. Click the point representing the radius of

the circle (point B2). The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area).

4. The circle is now inserted in the diagram. The default properties (color, line thickness and type) are given by the program setting (see Chap. 21.3) and can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 12.1.2), just like the component’s position and dimensions.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Note:

When inserting a circle, the image of the surrounding graphics may be damaged (disappearance of the grid, irregular display of geometry). These image faults can be remedied by using the function Regen function from the View drop-down menu (see Chap. 13.1).

11.15.4 Text

1. Click on the Text icon. 2. Click the bottom left corner of the text (point B1). The clicked

point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). 3. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the text string and the font height:

4. The text is now inserted in the diagram. The default properties (color) are given by the

program setting (see Chap. 21.3) and can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 12.1.2), jus like the position, font height and the text itself. The text font cannot be modified in this version.

11.16 Drawing tools The following drawing tools are applied when creating a wiring diagram and inserting free graphics:

Grid - a mesh of dots filling the drawing area and allowing easier orientation. The grid display can be turned on/off by using the Grid function in the Tools menu, or by pressing F7. The grid density (distance between the dots) can be set in the Options menu under the Page tab (see Chap. 21.1). Tip: It is suitable to turn off the grid when working with large formats (where it slows down the Zoom function) or when exporting graphics into BMP format (raster image suitable for insertion into text editors).

Ortho - locking the pointer movement within the direction of the coordinate axes. With Ortho turned on, only horizontal or vertical lines can be drawn for instance. When cable lines are drawn (see Chap. 11.6, 11.7), it is turned on automatically. In other cases, it can be turned off by using the Ortho function in the Tools menu, or by pressing F8.

Snap - automatic capturing of the clicked point to the tops of the invisible grid with the given spacing. The snap cannot be turned off and its spacing cannot be modified (it corresponds to the size of wiring diagram tags). By default, the snap spacing is identical to the distance between the grid dots.

Field for the text string entry. Only one line of text can be entered per one activation of the function.

Font height in points.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


12. Editing the Network Wiring Diagram _______________________________________________

12.1 Properties editing The term of properties editing shall be understood as modification of all geometric properties (position, dimensions) as well as non-geometric properties (color, line thickness and type, electrical parameters) of the component forming part of the network wiring diagram. There are two ways of selecting the component to be edited: By using the Properties icon:

1. Click on the Properties icon in the tool bar. 2. The mouse pointer will change to the form of the selection square. Now you will be requested

to select the component to be edited (the request to do so is displayed in the status bar in the bottom part of the main program window, see Chap. 10.1).

3. Click on any line constituting the component, the properties of which you want to modify (so that such line lies within the selection square). A dialogue panel will appear allowing to edit all properties of the selected component. The appearance of the dialogue panel depends on the type of the edited component.

By double-clicking the component:

1. Make sure that no other command is active (the status bar in the bottom part of the main program window is empty and the mouse pointer has the shape of an arrow).

2. Double-click on any line constituting the component, the properties of which you want to modify. A dialogue panel will appear allowing to edit all properties of the selected component. The appearance of the dialogue panel depends on the type of the edited component.

Dialogue panel allowing you to edit all properties of the selected component. The appearance of the dialogue panel depends on the type of the edited component (here a general load component).

Component selected to be edited

Point of clicking on the component (any line constituting the component).

Status bar

Properties icon.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


12.1.1 Editing the properties of network components

1. Select the component from the network wiring diagram, the properties of which you want to edit (see Chap. 12.1).

2. A dialogue panel will open in the form identical to the one shown when inserting the component into the network (see Chap. 11.1-11.10). In this dialogue panel, you can modify all electrical properties of the component depending on its type.

3. Every dialogue panel, regardless of the component type, includes the Graphics tab allowing you to edit the position or dimensions, as the case may be, of the symbol representing the component in the network wiring diagram. (Note: graphics editing can be carried out with higher comfort by using the Stretch function - see Chap. 12.4):

The Graphics tab for components formed only by a symbol (network, generator, transformer, motor, circuit breaker, …):

The Graphics tab for components of electric line type (busbar systems, cables, trunks):

Coordinates of the component insertion point. The coordinate system origin is located in the upper left corner of the image; positive direction of the Y axis is downwards.

Distance between the tag and the component insertion point.

Coordinates of the initial (first clicked) point of the line. The coordinate system origin is located in the upper left corner of the image; positive direction of the Y axis is downwards.

Coordinates of the individual breakpoints in the line. The last point in the table is end point of the line.

Distance between the tag and the component insertion point, i.e. the initial line point.

Specification of new coordinates for the selected line breakpoint (from the table above the item).

Registration of the new coordinates specified for the selected line breakpoint into the list.

Symbol dimensions and angle cannot be changed.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


When editing the breakpoints of a line, first of all select the breakpoint to be edited in the table, then adjust the X and Y coordinates in the fields below the table and at last click on the Record… button. Please keep in mind that the Trunk component can be placed only parallel to the X axis and that the particular line sections should be parallel to the X and Y axes.

The origin of the coordinate system is located in the upper left corner of the drawing, the positive direction of the X axis is to the right and the positive direction of the Y axis is downwards (!!).

All entered coordinates are automatically rounded up to multiples of 5 (grid snap).

The color of the diagram components is given by the settings in the Options (see Chap. 21.2). The line thickness for diagram components as well as the font height for symbol cannot be adjusted.

4. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The performed changes will be registered in the

system. In case of changes in the Graphics tab, the wiring diagram will be redrawn. If the results of any calculation were shown in the diagram prior to calling this function, such results will disappear after the performed editing since they would no longer correspond to the new network configuration. A new calculation must be performed - see Chap. 14.

Insertion point - initial (first clicked) point of the line.

Tag position in relation to the insertion point.

The crosses represent the breakpoints in the line.

Line path.

Positive direction of the Y axis is downwards!!

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


12.1.2 Editing the properties of free graphics components

1. Select the free graphics component, the properties of which you want to edit (see Chap. 12.1). 2. A dialogue panel will appear on the screen depending on the component type:

A line selected:

A rectangle selected:

A circle selected:

Setting of the non-geometric component properties. After clicking on the respective button, select the property from the list of offered options. Dashed lines can be only of thickness 1 (the thinnest).

Modification of the component geometry –any coordinates can be entered. The coordinate system origin is located in the upper left corner of the image; positive direction of the Y axis is downwards. Geometry modification can be carried out with higher comfort by means of the Stretch function - see Chap. 12.4).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A text selected:

3. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The component will be redrawn to the new position.

12.1.3 Batch properties editing - limit voltage drops and limit disconnection time The properties of maximum voltage drop in the network node with respect to the power supply voltage, the maximum voltage drop on the network line and the maximum disconnection time of the protective device are set locally for every component. Their editing is possible either within the editing of every particular component (see Chap. 12.1) or by batches. That way it is possible to easily set a uniform maximum disconnection time, for instance, for a group of 10 circuit breakers protecting the outlets in one space.

1. Select the item Properties dUmax, TtrMax from the Modify drop-down menu (the function cannot be accessed through icons).

2. The mouse pointer will change to the form of the selection square. Now you are requested to select the components, for which you want to edit the property dUmax (limit voltage drop in the node or in the line) and TtrMax (maximum disconnection time of the protective device).

3. Select all components, the properties of which you want to edit. You can either click on any line constituting the component or - which is more suitable - you can use the cross selection window):

Click to a place where no component is located (point B1) - thus activating the selection window.

If you move the mouse to the left from the first clicked point, the selection window is dragged crosswise (all components lying within the window or partially reaching into the window will be selected).

Click the opposite window corner (point B3). The selected components will be highlighted.

Tip: by using the Options function, it is possible to modify the control over the selection windows (either identical to AutoCAD with click-click - default setting, or identical to Windows with click-hold).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Click the right mouse button to exit the selection set. A dialogue panel will open, in which you set the required values (the accessibility of the items depends on the type of the selected components; e.g. if you select only circuit breakers, the setting of the maximum disconnection time of the protective device only will be accessible):

5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The new entered values will be recorded in the

selected components. After calculation completion, it will be checked whether the calculated voltage drop and disconnection time values do not exceed the limit set in here (for more details see Chap. 14.3 and 14.4). To view the set values in the wiring diagram with the print option see Chap. 14.6.

12.1.4 Batch properties editing – tags The ‘tag’ attribute is set locally for each component when the component is being inserted in the wiring diagram. This attribute can be edited either within the framework of editing each individual component (see Chap. 12.1) or ‘in bulk’ – in this case, the end-position number is changed automatically. This way, for example, it is possible to easily renumber a group of circuit-breakers that has been transferred by means of the clipboard from another project (see Chap. 12.6).

Selection of a group of circuit breakers, for which we require an identical maximum disconnection time to be set by means of the cross-wise selection window.

The first corner of the selection window; it must lie to the right from the selected objects.

Move the mouse to the right from the first clicked point to drag the selection window crosswise (all components lying inside the window or at least partially reaching into it will be selected).

Opposite corner of the selection window.

Setting of limit drops and disconnection time for the selected components. Accessibility of the items depends on the type of the selected components.

Roll the list down and select one of the values required by the regulation (for a theoretic analysis of what value and when can be used see Chap. 3.7, 4.1); any arbitrary value can also be entered manually.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1. Choose the item ‘Tags’ from the ‘Modification’ drop-down menu (this function can not be accessed through the icons).

2. The cursor’s form will change to the selection square. Now, you are prompted to select the components for bulk editing of tags.

3. Select all the components whose attributes should be changed (the components will be numbered in the order in which they have been selected). Click any line that forms the component, or use the selection window (for more details, see the ‘Move’ function, Chap. 12.2, item 3 of the instruction). In the event that the selection window is used, the order of the components in the selection set can not be influenced. Also, different types of components can be selected (e.g. circuit-breakers and cables); the items selected can be filtered subsequently.

4. The selection set is to be closed by right-clicking. Set the required values in the dialogue panel that is displayed subsequently:

5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking on the OK button. The newly specified values will be

recorded into the components selected. This function does not carry out the check for unwanted duplicities. This check is carried out automatically, before any computation is performed.

12.2 Changing component position

1. Click on the Move icon in the tool bar. 2. The mouse pointer will change to the form of the selection square. Now you will be

requested to select the components to be moved (the request to do so is displayed in the status bar in the bottom part of the main program window, see Chap. 10.1).

3. Select all components that you want to move. Now click on any line constituting the component (point B1) or use the selection windows:

Click to a place where no component is located (point B2) - thus activating the selection window.

If you move the mouse to the left from the first clicked point, the selection window is dragged crosswise (all components lying within the window or partially reaching into the window will be selected).

If you move the mouse to the right from the first clicked point, the selection window of window type is dragged (only components lying fully within the window will be selected).

Filter of the component type. In this case, tags will be changed only for the circuit-breakers selected, without regard to the other components that may be included in the selection set.

The text in front of the number, the number of the first component selected, and the numbering step; the tags of the components selected (in this case, the tags of the circuit-breakers selected) will be changed to FA12.1, FA12.2, FA12.3, FA12.4, etc.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Click the opposite window corner (point B3). The selected components will be highlighted.

Tip: by using the Options function, it is possible to modify the control over the selection windows (either identical to AutoCAD with click-click - default setting, or identical to Windows with click-hold).

4. Click the right mouse button to exit the selection set. 5. Click two points defining the displacement vector - B4, B5 in the figure. The clicked points

will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). The selected components will be moved to the new position.

12.3 Copying components

1. Click on the Copy icon in the tool bar. 2. The mouse pointer will change to the form of the selection square. Now you will be

requested to select the components to be copied (the request to do so is displayed in the status bar in the bottom part of the main program window, see Chap. 10.1).

3. Select all components that you want to copy (click on any line constituting the component - points B1, B2, B3 in the figure. The selected component will be highlighted. You can also use the selection windows (for more details see the Move function, Chap. 12.2, step 3).

4. Click the right mouse button to exit the selection set. 5. Click two points defining the displacement vector - B4, B5 in the figure. The clicked points

will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). The selected components will be copied to a new position. When copying components constituting one wiring diagram, the tags of the copied components will be changed in order to avoid any undesired duplicities (the tags can be adjusted additionally, either by editing the individual components – see Chap. 12.1, or in bulk, by means of the Tags function – see Chap. 12.1.4).

6. Click another point determining the position of the next copy - point B6. 7. Repeat step 5 until you create the required number of copies. Click the right mouse button to

exit the copying mode.

After editing: Before editing:

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


12.4 Modifying the component geometry - stretch

1. Click on the Stretch icon in the tool bar. 2. The mouse pointer will change to the form of the selection square. Now you will be

requested to select the component to be stretched (the request to do so is displayed in the status bar in the bottom part of the main program window, see Chap. 10.1).

3. Select a component lying near the point you want to stretch (end point of a line; corner of a rectangle; initial, end or breakpoint of a cable line; tag etc.), point B1 in the figure. Now drag the radius vector from the selected definition point, you will be requested to specify its new position.

4. Click the new position of the selected point - point B2. The clicked point will be automatically captured in the grid (colored dots in the graphics area). The object shape will be adjusted accordingly.

12.5 Erasing components

1. Click on the Erase icon in the tool bar. 2. The mouse pointer will change to the form of the selection square. Now you will be requested

to select the component to be erased (the request to do so is displayed in the status bar in the bottom part of the main program window, see Chap. 10.1).



_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3. Select all components that you want to erase (click on any line constituting the component). The selected component will be highlighted. You can also use the selection windows (for more details see the Move function, Chap. 12.2, item 3 in the Manual).

4. Click the right mouse button to exit the selection set. The selected components will be erased.

12.6 Using the clipboard The xSpider program’s clipboard serves for transferring and copying of objects either among simultaneously opened projects or within the framework of the currently opened project. Objects are either free graphics or components that form a wiring diagram. The utilization method is similar to the utilization method for the Windows clipboard in other programs. The necessary functions can be found in the Edit drop-down menu. The standard icons and the Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V keyboard shortcuts are available. Notes:

The clipboard can not be used to transfer objects into other programs (e.g. for transferring of graphics into CAD systems, such as AutoCAD, or into Word). To transfer graphics into other programs, you can use the Export function (see. Chap. 19.2 and 19.3).

The clipboard can not be used to transfer objects from other programs. Objects (graphics) can not be imported from other programs.

12.6.1 Cut objects to the clipboard

1. Click on the icon Cut Objects to Clipboard at the toolbar, or use the Ctrl+X keyboard shortcut.

2. The cursor’s form will change to the selection square. Now, you are prompted to select the component that is to be cut to the clipboard (the prompt is displayed at the status line).

3. Select all the components that should be cut to the clipboard (click any line that forms a component). The component selected will be highlighted. The selection windows can be used as well (for more details, see the Move function, Chap. 12.2, item 3 of the instruction).

4. Right-click to close the selection set. The components that have been selected will be removed from the project and cut to the xSpider program’s clipboard. For ‘Paste the objects from the clipboard’, refer to Chap. 12.6.3.

12.6.2 Copy objects to the clipboard

1. Click on the icon Copy Objects to Clipboard at the toolbar, or use the Ctrl+C keyboard shortcut.

2. The cursor’s form will change to the selection square. Now, you are prompted to select the component that is to be copied to the clipboard (the prompt is displayed at the status line).

3. Select all the components that should be copied to the clipboard (click any line that forms a component). The component selected will be highlighted. The selection windows can be used as well (for more details, see the Move function, Chap. 12.2, item 3 of the instruction).

4. Close the selection set by right-clicking. The components that have been selected will be copied to the xSpider program’s clipboard (they remain in the project). For ‘Paste the objects from the clipboard into the project’, refer to Chap. 12.6.3.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


12.6.3 Paste objects from the clipboard

1. Click on the icon Paste from the Clipboard at the toolbar, or use the Ctrl+V keyboard shortcut. 2. If the clipboard does not contain any objects of the xSpider program, an information message

will be displayed (the clipboard can not be used to transfer objects from other programs; objects (graphics) from other programs can not be imported). For ‘Cut or Copy the objects to the clipboard’, refer to Chap. 12.6.1, 12.6.2.

3. If the clipboard contains at least one object of the xSpider program, the mouse cursor will change in a way similar to the operation of inserting the symbol of a wiring diagram. Determination is requested of the positions of the objects within the graphical area (the prompt is displayed at the status line).

4. Click a point – the top left corner of the imaginary rectangle that would enclose the objects in the clipboard. The objects from the clipboard will be pasted into the project. The exact positions of the objects can be subsequently adjusted by means of the Move function (see Chap. 12.2). For elements that form a wiring diagram, the tags of the components being copied will be changed so as to prevent unwanted duplicities from occurring (the tags can be modified additionally either by editing the individual components – see Chap. 12.1, or in bulk, by means of the Tags function – see Chap. 12.1.4).

12.7 Searching item in wiring diagram according to tag Any item from wiring diagram can be looked up by function Find (Ctrl+F) from the Edit drop-down menu. Item is searched according to its tag (designation like FA1, WL1, LOAD1, …). The tag can be set exactly or wildcard characters can be used (? substitutes one character, * substitutes a group of characters). Looked up item is pointed by cyan rectangle an can be zoomed by clicking Zoom to button.

Copy the objects to the clipboard: 1. Press Ctrl+C. 2. Select the objects by means of the

crossing window (click points B1 and B2).

3. Right-click to close the selection set.

B1

B2

Source project Target project

B3

Paste the objects from the clipboard: 1. Switch to the target project (by clicking

inside the window or by pressing Ctrl+F6).

2. Press Ctrl+V. 3. Click the insertion point (point B3).

The imaginary rectangle that would enclose the objects in the clipboard.

The insertion point – the top left corner of the rectangle that would enclose the objects in the clipboard.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


13. View Control (Zoom) _______________________________________________ The view control (zooming in and out in the design sections) is based on the method of operation applied in CAD systems (such as AutoCAD). The program makes drawings in area having the dimensions of infinity x infinity. The screen of your monitor is only like a zooming glass, a „peep-hole“ through which you look at a part of the infinite drawing area. Depending on if the zooming glass is further from or closer to the area, you see a larger or smaller part of the design in it, with smaller or larger details. The individual functions can be activated from the View drop-down menu, or by clicking on the appropriate icon in the tool bar or from the pop-up context menu, which is displayed after clicking the right mouse button inside the graphics area.

13.1 Regenerating images

1. Select the Regen item from the View drop-down menu. 2. The image will be regenerated - image faults will be eliminated. It is recommended to be used

e.g. after changing the main program window dimensions by dragging its edge or in case of faulty diagram representation after a non-standard termination of some editing operation.

13.2 Pan

1. Select the Pan item from the View drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. The pan mode is activated. The standard mouse pointer (usually an arrow) is changed to the pan pointer (arrows up/down, left/right). Click to the image with your mouse, hold the left button down and move the mouse slowly. The graphics is dragged simultaneously with the mouse move. Some texts are not drawn during the move. Note: on slower computers and with complicated and large diagrams, the movement can be jerky or the graphics might not move at all. In such case use the scroll bars at the side of the graphics area.

3. Release the left mouse button - the graphics will be redrawn in the new position. 4. Press Esc to exit the pan mode (or click with the right mouse button and select Exit

Zoom/Pan mode from the pop-up context menu). Tip: the pan function can be also activated by pressing the middle mouse button (wheel) even if parallel to another performed command (such as when inserting a component in the wiring diagram or when selecting objects for some editing operation, e.g. their move):

1. Click the middle mouse button, hold it down and move the mouse slowly. The standard mouse pointer (usually an arrow) is changed to the pan pointer (arrows up/down, left/right). The pan mode is activated - the graphics is dragged simultaneously with the mouse move. Note: on slower computers and with complicated and large diagrams, the movement can be jerky or the graphics might not move at all. In such case use the scroll bars at the side of the graphics area.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2. Release the middle mouse button - the graphics will be redrawn in the new position. In case the operation was called parallel to another function, it is now possible to continue in this function.

13.3 Zoom in / zoom out

1. Select the Zoom realtime item from the View drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. The Zoom Realtime mode is activated. The standard mouse pointer (usually an arrow) is changed to the Zoom Realtime pointer (arrow up/down). Click to the image with your mouse, hold the left button down and move the mouse slowly. When moving upwards, the image is enlarged (zoomed in); when moving downwards it is reduced (zoomed out). Some texts are not drawn during the move. Note: the movement can be jerky on slower computers or the graphics might not move at all. In such case use the Zoom Window function to enlarge the image (see Chap. 13.4) and the Zoom All function to reduce the image (see Chap. 13.6). The function sensitivity (ratio between the distance dragged by the mouse and the image size) can be modified by using the Options function under the System tab (see Chap. 21.1).

3. Release the left mouse button - the graphics will be redrawn in the new position. 4. Press Esc to exit the Zoom Realtime mode (or click with the right mouse button and select

Exit Zoom/Pan mode from the pop-up context menu).


The mouse-pointer form in the Pan mode. Scroll bars to move through the diagram view.

Drag the mouse with the left (or the middle) mouse button being pressed down.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Tip: the Zoom function can be also activated by scrolling the mouse wheel of the IntelliMouse type. However, this feature must be first activated and its sensitivity must be set in the Options function under the System tab (see Chap. 21.1). Attention: only some drivers for some mouse types are supported.

13.4 Zooming in a part of the design (Zoom Window)

1. Select the Zoom Window item from the View drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. The Zoom Window mode is activated. The standard mouse pointer (usually an arrow) is changed to the Zoom Window pointer (crosshair). Specify the area you want to be zoomed-in: click the first corner of the rectangle and move the mouse - a rectangle is dragged defining the area to be zoomed-in. Click the opposite corner of the rectangle.

3. The specified area will be zoomed-in. You can return to the previous image by using the Zoom Previous function (see Chap. 13.5).

The mouse-pointer form in the Quick Zoom mode.

Drag the mouse with the left button being pressed down.

Moving diagram in the window is possible by means of the Pan function, see Chap. 13.2.


The mouse-pointer form in the Zoom Window mode (crosshair).

Two clicked points – opposite corners of the selection rectangle specifying the area to be zoomed in.


_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Tip: by using the Options function (see Chap. 21.1), it is possible to modify the Zoom Window control (either identical to AutoCAD: click-click - default setting, or identical to Windows: click-hold).

13.5 Return to the previous image (Zoom Previous)

1. Select the Zoom Previous item from the View drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. The previous image will (if any) will be restored. Only one single step can be restored.

13.6 Viewing the drawing area image (Zoom All)

1. Select the Zoom All item from the View drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. The entire drawing area will be displayed. The image will be zoomed in or out in order to show the entire network drawing in the current graphical window.

13.7 Hide calculation results

1. Select the Hide Calculation Results item from the View drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. Results of the last performed calculation, which are shown in the network wiring diagram with the particular components, will be erased. A new calculation must be performed if you want them to be shown in the drawing again (for more details see Chap. 14).


Results of the last performed calculation are shown (here the voltage drop and load distribution calculation).

Calculation results were hidden. A newcalculation must be performed to show them again (see Chap. 14).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


14. Network Parameter Calculations _______________________________________________ Once the network wiring diagram (topology) has been designed, it is possible to proceed with network parameter calculations. There is a number of computational algorithms available, both complex (related to the network as a whole) and local, being focused only on a certain network segment (such as short circuit in one selected node). The particular computational algorithms are launched through the Calculation function from the Tools drop-down menu, or by clicking on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. A dialogue panel will open, showing a list of calculation methods grouped as follows:

Basic calculations – includes only the most important calculations required by the standard. This group will be the only one used by the most common users.

All calculations – includes completely all calculation procedures that are available in xSpider. The functions from this group are intended, in particular, for advanced users.

Set parameters for calculations – includes functions to modify the software behaviour. The functions from this group are intended, in particular, for advanced users.

Double click on the selected line to start the respective calculation.

14.1 Dimensioning of cables and protective devices If you are using xSpider in the design mode, this function will perform automatic dimensioning for those protective devices and lines, for which the Dimension automatically switch was enabled. Parameters of other components, for which the Dimension automatically switch is disabled, must be already defined and will not be modified by this function. The automatic dimensioning algorithm will assign the types of conductors and protective devices from the database tables. The assignment process is controlled by the Options function (can be

See Chap. 14.4

See Chap. 14.3

See Chap. 14.1

See Chap. 14.2

Complex network check, the following calculations are carried out step by step: voltage drops and load distribution (see Chap. 14.3), 3-phase symmetric short-circuit and 1-phase short-circuit (see Chap. 14.4).

Drag the edges to adjust the dialogue panel size.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


activated from the Tools drop-down menu), AutoDimensioning tab (for more details see also Chap. 21.5):

For cables: If the conductor material and the insulation were defined by the user when the cable was inserted in the wiring diagram (under the Details tab – see Chap.11.7), the values set here will be applied; if nothing was defined, the default values specified in Options under the AutoDimensioning tab will be applied. The number of wires will be determined automatically based on the number of phases connected.

For enclosed busbar distribution: If the conductor material and the design were defined by the user when the component was inserted in the wiring diagram (under the Details tab – see Chap.11.6), the values set here will be applied; if nothing was defined, the default values specified in Options under the AutoDimensioning tab will be applied. The number of wires will be determined automatically based on the number of phases connected.

For circuit-breakers: All circuit-breaker types (modular as well as power circuit-breakers) are dimensioned. The characteristics and type of the tripping release is defined automatically based on the nature of the load. The number of poles is determined based on the number of phases connected and based on the settings specified in Options under the AutoDimensioning tab. The product series preferences are defined in Options. In case of equivalence of parameters, the higher ranking type series circuit-breaker is used. Example: The product-series sequence is set as follows: PL6, PL7, PLHT … By preference, PL6

type-series circuit-breakers (Icn=6kA) will be used wherever possible; only in case of unsuitable breaking capacity, PL7 (Icn=10kA), or PLHT (Icn=25kA) circuit-breakers will be used.

The product-series sequence is set as follows: PL7, PLHT, PL6 … By preference, PL7 type-series circuit-breakers (Icn=10kA) will be used even if the expected short-circuit current is lower than 6kA; only in case of unsuitable breaking capacity, PLHT (Icn=25kA) circuit-breakers will be used.

For fuses: The number of poles is determined based on the number of phases connected. The product series preferences are defined in the same manner as with circuit-breakers based on the settings specified in Options under the AutoDimensioning tab.

For switch-disconnectors: All switch-disconnector types (modular as well as power switch-disconnectors) are dimensioned. The number of poles and the product series preferences are defined in the same manner as with circuit-breakers.

Dialogue panel can be activated by using the Options function from the Tools drop-down menu.

Specification of some conductor parameters that will be assigned by the Dimension Automatically function to the components, for which the Dimension automatically switch was enabled and for which these parameters were not set when the component was inserted in the wiring diagram.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The components are dimensioned so that they meet the checks required by the relevant standard (see Chap.1 - 4). The proposed design can certainly not be considered as ideal, and its technical feasibility must always be assessed.

1. Create the network wiring diagram (topology).

Precise parameters of the inserted components (power sources, loads) must be entered.

Parameters of the user-defined components (lines, protective devices) must not be entered, but the Dimension automatically switch must be activated for every component.

Such user-defined components can also exist within the network, which have already been determined (by their selection from the database) and their dimensioning is not required - the Dimension automatically switch must be disabled for these components.

2. Set the automatic dimensioning parameters by using the Options function. For more details see Chap. 21.5.

3. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. In the list of computational algorithms under the Basic calculations group, double click on the line called Cable and protective device dimensioning.

4. The calculation will now be performed. If it is not possible to find a suitable component in the data table defined in the Options, the algorithm will fail. In such case it is necessary to dimension the component automatically, disable the Dimension automatically switch and repeat step 3.

5. A complex check of the entire network will be carried out at the end of the calculation for all components regardless of whether or not they have been dimensioned. Results of the particular checks are displayed in dialogue panels (every panel can be closed by clicking on the X in the upper right corner or by pressing Esc):

Required number of poles for protective and switching devices..

Preference settings for product series – determines the sequence, in which the individual types will be assigned during AutoDimensioning.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Based on the checking results, the network design can be modified with the application of

algorithms described below with the aim to achieve maximum optimization. Notes:

Before you start with the calculation, check the correctness of the fault tripping time from power source for all protective devices. Technically unjustified, too low values can result in algorithm failure.

It is not recommended to automatically dimension couplings in meshed networks. Simultaneous factors will be ignored in case of meshed networks.

14.2 Network connection logic check This function checks the logical links between the network components. In case of any problem, an error message appears indicating the fault description and instructions for its remedy. The function is activated automatically prior to every calculation. It is recommended to launch it separately after completing the layout of a new diagram in order to eliminate mistakes made during the drawing process. Examples of the most frequent logic errors together with instructions for their remedy are specified at the end of chapters defining the insertion of the particular network components - see Chap. 11.1 - 11.10.

14.3 Voltage drops and load distribution The function calculates network behavior at the rated operating state and under overload. The function can be applied if you are using xSpider in the control mode. There are algorithms available: Algorithm omitting the impact of the voltage drop: due to the impedance of conductors located between the power supply source and the load, the voltage in load terminals is lower than the supply unit voltage. However, the current consumed by the load will not be affected by this drop. In other words, the load currents are constant. It is a conventional calculation; the obtained results are comparable with outputs of common methods. This algorithm is available in the following versions:

Printing the list of error components as a basis for further editing.

Description of the performed check.

List of error components including specification of the problem.

Drag the corners or the partition to change the dialogue panel size.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


For radial networks – taking the simultaneous factors into account (available in the Basic calculations group in the Calculation dialogue panel).

For general networks, both radial and meshed networks, using the admittance matrix method – the simultaneous coefficients are ignored (available in the All calculations group in the Calculation dialogue panel).

Algorithm taking into account the impact of the voltage drop: due to the impedance of conductors located between the power supply source and the load, the voltage in load terminals is lower than the supply unit voltage. However, since loads work with constant output, the voltage drop results in increase in the consumed current. The increase in the consumed current leads to increase in voltage drops. In other words, the load outputs are constant. The network balance state is found through iteration method. Though this calculation is more precise, it is also more time-consuming and its results may be slightly different from those obtained by common methods. The function is available in the All calculations group in the Calculation dialogue panel.

1. We assume that the network wiring diagram (topology) has been defined and all network components have been dimensioned.

2. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. In the list of computational algorithms under the Basic calculations group, double click on the line called Voltage drops and load distribution.

3. The network type is detected automatically. The algorithm that takes simultaneous factors into account is applied automatically for radial networks. For meshed networks, information about the ignored simultaneous factors is indicated to the user. When the calculation continues, the algorithm working with the admittance matrices will be used. Alternatively, the calculation can be terminated and the meshed network can be transformed to a radial one through an appropriate modification of the operating status / switching off of some switching devices.

4. Calculation will be performed, followed by the individual checks:

Check of voltage drops in the nodes with respect to power source voltage. Such nodes are not compliant where the voltage drop exceeds the limit set when inserting the component.

Check of voltage drops in branches. Such branches are not compliant where the voltage drop exceeds the limit set when inserting the component.

Check of circuit breakers and fuses for nominal current. Such devices are not compliant where the current in the branch exceeds the nominal current of the device (switching off takes place at the nominal state already).

Check of switch-disconnectors for nominal current. Check of switch-disconnector pre-protection.

Check of busbars for rated current load. Such components are not compliant where the current in the branch exceeds the rated current of the component. The component’s rated current is determined with respect to its installation.

Check of cables for rated current load. Such components are not compliant where the current in the branch exceeds the rated current of the component (determined with respect to its installation, ambient temperature, cable grouping etc).

Check of cable overload protection. The nominal current of the protective device must be smaller than the cable current-carrying capacity determined with respect to its installation and ambient temperature (first term from article 433.2 from IEC 60364-4-43). Second term I2≤1.45*Iz from article 433.2 from IEC 60364-4-43 must be completed also. The ampere-second heating characteristics of the cable must lie above the tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker (this test is not required by IEC 60364-4-43 and can

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


switched off - see Chap. 21.4). For more details see the theoretical introduction, Chap. 2.3. The ampere-second characteristics of the cable in relation to the respective protective device can be viewed by means of the Tripping Characteristics module (see Chap. 15).

Check of transformer and generator for load and protection.

Components on the transformer line are checked for the transformer nominal current regardless of the current load.

The check results are displayed in a dialogue panel (close the panel by clicking on the “x” in the top right corner or by pressing Esc):

4. Based on the checking results, the network design can be modified and this function can be repeated. The calculation results are displayed in the network wiring diagram. This diagram can be printed out (see Chap. 18), or it is possible to draw a list of components with the calculation results and print it out then (see Chap. 18), or to export it in a data file (see Chap. 19).

Notes:

In case there is at least one 1-phase consumption in the network, the calculation is carried out separately for every phase. Voltage drops and currents are showed for every phase separately in L1, L2, L3 and N sequence. This allows you to verify the load distribution to the particular phases. All checks are carried out with respect to the most loaded phase.

For display of the connected phases of the individual components - see Chap. 14.6.

The cosPhi power factor is determined automatically in 3-phase network nodes formed by the switchboard trunk component (when the general-network algorithm working with the admittance matrix method is applied). The program does not allow the user to enter the target power factor; the required compensation volume must be determined by trial and error through successive insertion of various-size condensers. The possibility of changing the operating state of switching and protective devices can be used as an advantage for successive connection of the individual condensers. For insertion of the Compensation component see Chap. 11.13.

The simultaneous factor is taken into account in radial networks only. In meshed networks, the operating state of circuit-breakers can be modified (on/off) to test the network behavior in different operating conditions.

In case of unbalanced networks with 1-phase loads, the voltage on the low-load or tripped phase can be higher than the power source voltage; in such case, different computational algorithms can deliver slightly different results.

Print the list of error components as a basis for further editing.

Description of the performed check.

List of error components including specification of the problem.


Closing the dialogue panel and moving to the next check (pressing the Esc has the same function).

Closing the dialogue panel and moving to the next check (the same effect can be achieved by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of by pressing Esc).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


By using the Options function (see Chap. 21.4) it is possible to:

Activate the display of the real and the imaginary components of currents (show currents as complex numbers),

Override the feature of highlighting error components in the diagram,

Activate the display of admittance matrices and other intermediate results of the calculation.

Only 3-phase meshed network (simultaneous coefficients are ignored; the power factor in network nodes is calculated); there is no 1-phase load present:

Voltage of the power source (sources) is fixed (delta voltage)

dUwl is voltage drop on the given line (identical in all phases)

Iwl is the current flowing through the given line (the percentage line load is indicated in the brackets).

Unode is voltage in the node (delta voltage); dUnode is the voltage drop in the node in relation to the power source voltage; cosPhi is the power factor.

Inode is the current taken by the load (with respect to the utilization factor Ku).

Unode is the voltage in the node – here on the load terminals. dUnode is the voltage drop in relation to the power source voltage.

Indication of the error component that failed to comply during one of the checks (in this case, the current on line Iwl is higher than the current of the thermal release of circuit-breaker Ir).

Tag

Type

Transformer voltage is fixed (the transformer is running as an ideal device).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Only 3-phase radial network (simultaneousness taken into account); there is no 1-phase load present:

Network containing at least one 1-phase load:

The voltage of the power source (sources) is fixed.

Inode - current taken by the load in the particular phases (absolute value) with respect to the utilization factor Ks.

dUnode - voltage drop in the node in relation to the power source voltage for the particular phases.

Iwl is the current flowing through the given line in the particular phases and N-conductors (absolute value)

dUwl is the voltage drop on the given line in the particular phases (= in this case, voltage drop on cable CAB8).

Indication of the error component that failed to comply during one of the checks (in this case, the current on line Iwl is higher than the nominal current of circuit-breaker In).

Ks - simultaneous factor; dUnode - voltage drop in relation to the power source voltage.

1-phase branch line.

3-phase branch line.

Inode is the current taken by the load (with respect to the utilization factor Ku).

dUnode is the voltage drop in relation to the power source voltage.

dUwl is the voltage drop on the given line (identical in all phases)

Iwl is the current flowing through the given line (the percentage line load is indicated in the brackets).

The power source and transformer voltages are fixed; the voltage drop is always zero.

Current taken from the transformer (the percentage load of the transformer is indicated in the brackets)

Ks - simultaneous factor in the given node; dUnode - voltage drop in the node in relation to the power source voltage.

Iwl is the current flowing through the given line, taking into account the simultaneous factor in the node: Iwl(W1)=Ks*(Iwl(W2)+ Iwl(W3)+Iwl(W4) Note: currents are summarized as vectors.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


14.4 Short-circuit currents There are several algorithms available in the program to calculate short-circuit currents. The first group of algorithms is based on the assumption that the short circuit will occur only in one selected network node - this is useful when we are solving one specific outlet for instance. The other group carries out a complex check of the entire network - the short circuit occurs in all nodes one by one. The calculation of asymmetric short circuits against ground depends on the selected network type (see Chap. 11.1)

Short-circuit currents: 3-phase symmetric short circuit Ik3p - analysis of network behavior under a short circuit in a single selected network node, check for the load applied on network components due to the short-circuit current (maximum short circuit).

Short-circuit currents: 2-phase asymmetric short circuit Ik2p - school-level problem, this calculation is usually not required.

Short-circuit currents: 2-phase asymmetric short circuit against ground Ik2PE - school-level problem, this calculation is usually not required.

Short-circuit currents: 1-phase asymmetric short circuit Ik1p - analysis of network behavior under a short circuit in a single selected network node, check for the load applied on network components due to the short-circuit current and check for the fault point disconnection from source (minimum short circuit).

Entire network check: 3-phase symmetric short circuit Ik3p - the short circuit will occur in all network nodes one by one, check for the load applied on network components due to the short-circuit current (maximum short circuit).

Entire network check: 1-phase asymmetric short circuit Ik1p - the short circuit will occur in all network nodes one by one, check for the load applied on network components due to the short-circuit current and check for the fault point disconnection from source (minimum short circuit).

1. We assume that the network wiring diagram (topology) has been defined and all network

components have been dimensioned. 2. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. In the list of computational algorithms

under the Basic calculations group, double click on the line corresponding to the required short-circuit type (see the list above).

3. A dialogue panel with the definition of cascades is displayed (see Chap. 14.4.1); this panel is to be closed by pressing Esc.

4. If you select an algorithm calculating the short circuit only in a single node, in the next step you must select the node where the short circuit occurs. Double click on the component tag forming the short-circuited node.

5. The calculation will be performed. In case of a 3-phase symmetric short circuit in the selected network node, the waveform of the short-circuit current is displayed (the panel can be closed by clicking on the X in the upper right corner or by pressing Esc which will move you to the next check); the graph display function can be disabled in the Options - see Chap. 21.4):

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. The individual checks now follow:

Check of circuit breakers and fuses for breaking capacity. Such devices are not compliant for which the breaking short-circuit current in the branch exceeds the breaking capacity of the component. The breaking capacity of the device is determined by the or value in case of circuit breakers - depending on the setting of the „Dimension for …“ switch (see Chap. 11.7), or by the Icn value in case of fuses.

If a cascade has been defined (that is, the incoming protective components (at the incomers) and the outgoing protective components (at the outgoers) have been determined for each node formed by the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component – see Chap. 14.4.1), the breaking capacities of the outgoing protective components are assessed with respect to the incoming components (both the limitation of the short-circuit current by means of a fuse and the interoperation of the circuit-breakers are taken into account).

Check of switch-disconnectors for nominal current load. The switch disconnector will not disconnect the short circuit, but must be able to withstand the short-circuit current in the short term. Such devices are not compliant, for which the effective heating current in the branch per 1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(1s) of the component.

Protection against dangerous voltage in non-conductive parts (check for the fault disconnection time from source). It is carried out only for 1-phase short circuits. Such component, located closest to the short-circuit point, is not compliant for which the disconnection time exceeds the limit set when inserting the component.

Check of cables/busbars for short-circuit current load. Such devices are not compliant where the effective heating current in the branch per 0.1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(0.1s) of the component. For more details see the theoretical introduction, Chap. 3.6.

Check of the PEN conductor for short-circuit current load. It is carried out only for 1-phase short circuits in case the PEN conductor cross-section is smaller than the phase-conductor cross-section. Such devices are not compliant where the effective heating current in the branch per 0.1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(0.1s) of the PEN cable conductor.

Results of each one of the checks are displayed in dialogue panel (the panel can be closed by clicking on the X in the upper right corner or by pressing Esc which will move you to the next check). For panel control description see Chap. 14.3 item 3 in the Manual.

Values of time or current, as the case may be, corresponding to the current position of the mouse pointer.

Dialogue panel dimensions can be changed by dragging the corners.

Surge short-circuit current – amplitude of the first half-wave of the short-circuit current after the short-circuit occurrence (value Ikm).

Closing the dialogue panel and moving to the next check (same function achieved by pressing Esc).

Steady short-circuit current, its effective value is usually labeled marked Ik

’’.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


7. Based on the checking results, the network design can be modified and this function can be repeated. The calculation results are displayed in the network wiring diagram. This diagram can be printed out (see Chap. 18), or it is possible to draw a list of components with the calculation results and print it out then (see Chap. 18), or to export it in a data file (see Chap. 19).

Notes:

In case of IT networks, asymmetric short circuit against ground is calculated at the moment of a second fault.

In case of TT networks, it is necessary to enter the ground resistance Rt of the transformer node and the ground resistance Ra in the network node where the short circuit occurred.

The safety coefficient of 1.25, which is defined by the regulation and which increases the impedance of the short-circuit loop, is applied when calculating the disconnection time of the fault point from supply (for 1-phase short circuit)

If the fault point disconnection time from source is not compliant, it is possible to adjust the settings of the protective device releases (if possible for such device), otherwise it is necessary to increase the cross-section of the line in the branch.

Assessment of the short-circuit current strength of the protective devices that are connected to the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component: It is assumed that the short circuit, which the protective component at the outgoer has to withstand, may occur not only at the end of the line protected by this protective component, but also immediately behind the circuit-breaker. So, the breaking capacity of the component is assessed with respect to the short-circuit current of the node to which the protective component is connected (the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component). This solution improves the margin of safety.

In order to assess the selectivity, the ampere-second characteristics of the protective devices can be viewed by means of the Tripping Characteristics module (see Chap. 15).


Override the feature of highlighting error components in the diagram,


_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The calculation results shown in the network wiring diagram: the calculation of „Entire network check: 3-phase symmetric short circuit Ik3p“ performed (the short circuit is induced in the particular network nodes one by one, the calculated values are displayed for the particular nodes):

Ikm is the peak short-circuit current – the height of the first half-wave of the short-circuit current after the short circuit started; this is the current that causes dynamic effects. It is given only for the node where the short circuit is to occur.

Ik3p’’ is the initial impulse short-circuit current for a 3-phase short circuit (the effective value of the alternating symmetrical component at the moment when the short circuit started; for remote short circuits, the initial impulse short-circuit current is identical with the effective value of the steady short-circuit current).

If the component has not been adequately defined, the check can not be carried out and the component is marked as a non-conforming component. In the event of this switch disconnector, the one-second short-time withstand current has not been specified and so the short-circuit current strength of the switch disconnector can not be checked.

Tag

Type identification

Setting of the parameters of the release (displayed only if the component is fitted with an adjustable release).

Identification of the cascade; the breaking capacity of the component is assessed with respect to the given incoming component.

The cascade has not been determined, or the incoming protective component does not influence the breaking capacity of this component.

Indication for the error component that did not comply with some of the checks (here the switching current Itrip is higher than breaking capacity of the circuit breaker Ics).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Representation of the computation results at the wiring diagram: The computation ‘Short-circuit currents: 1-phase asymmetrical short-circuit Ik1p’ at node M3 has been carried out:

The values of the short-circuit currents are displayed only for the node where the short circuit has occurred.

Ikm is the peak short-circuit current.

Ik1p’’ is the initial impulse short-circuit current for the 1-phase short circuit.

Ik1p’’ is the initial impulse short-circuit current flowing trough the branch; it is distributed across the whole network, up to the power sources.

No short-circuit current is flowing through the branch (no motive-power load is connected; the branch does not contribute to the short circuit).

The protective component which is at the closest distance from the failure area; the Ttr time of failure disconnection from the power source has been determined.

Identification of the faulty component, which has not conformed to the conditions of some of the checks (in this case, the time of failure disconnection from the power source has not fulfilled the condition).

The safety coefficient of 1.25, which is stipulated by the standard in order to increase the impedance of the short-circuit loop, has been applied in the computation of the time of disconnection of the area of the failure from the power source.

Io – the fuse let-through short-circuit current; the peak value of the short-circuit current, which will be let through by the fuse. If there were no fuse there, the peak short-circuit current in this case would be Ikm=27 kA. Owing to the limiting capabilities of the fuse, this current will be limited to no more than 6.49 kA. In order that the circuit-breaker may be adequately protected, Io must be less than

the breaking capacity of the circuit-breaker, that is, Io<Ics(Icu)* 2 ; see Chap. 4.5 as well.

The node where the short circuit is to occur; the short-circuit currents have been computed as if there were no fuse there.

The selectivity of the circuit-breaker/fuse cascade according to the selectivity tables for the given types of devices; if the short-circuit current is less than the value given here (here, for example, the value is 4.2 kA), the circuit-breaker will switch off. In the other cases, the fuse will switch off.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


14.4.1 Cascades Creating of cascades is a concept in which an incoming circuit-breaker or a fuse are used to restrict the short-circuit current to a value which can be safely switched off by the outgoing circuit-breaker. If a prescribed combination of circuit-breakers and of the nominal currents of these circuit-breakers is used, it is guaranteed that the outgoing circuit-breaker can be used even in circuits with short-circuit conditions exceeding the breaking capacity of this circuit-breaker – for more details, see Chap. 4.5. The function ‘Cascades’ makes it possible to define the incoming protective components (at the incomers) and the outgoing protective components (at the outgoers) for each node formed by the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component. The breaking capacities of the outgoing protective components are assessed with respect to the incoming components (both the limitation of the short-circuit current by means of a fuse and the interoperation of the circuit-breakers are taken into account). Cascades can be defined by means of the separate function Cascades of the Tools pull-down menu. This function is called automatically before any short circuit computation, with the exception of a 1-phase short-circuit check of the whole network. Defining of cascades is not obligatory (for complex, ‘knotted’ networks, defining of cascades is sometimes not possible); if there is no cascade defined, the protective components do not influence one another. Cascades are pre-defined automatically for radial networks. Warning: Please, pay close attention to the defining of cascades. Incorrect determination of the incoming components may result in wrong conclusions. If you are not sure, do not set any incoming component.

1. We assume that the network wiring diagram (the topology) has been drawn correctly.

2. Select the item ‘Defining of Cascades’ from the ‘Tools’ drop-down menu (this function can not be accessed through the icons).

3. A dialogue panel will be displayed, which is similar to the panel with computation results (Chap. 14.3). In this panel, the incoming and outgoing protective components are represented for each ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component. In the default setting, there is no component defined as an incoming component (the protective components do not influence one another).

Editing the cascade for the node selected (changing the settings of the incoming and outgoing protective components).

Closing the dialogue panel and quitting the function (or continuing the computation); the panel can also be closed by pressing the Esc key or by clicking on the small cross at the right-hand top corner. The changes that have been made are always saved (the Cancel option is not available).

Please, pay attention to these comments.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Select the line (that is, the node formed by the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component) for which a

cascade should be defined (that is, the setting of the incoming and of the outgoing protective components should be changed).

5. Click on the icon Editing the Cascade (or double-click the line selected). Define the incoming and outgoing protective components in the dialogue panel that opens up subsequently:

6. Repeat items 4 and 5 for all the nodes (the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ components). 7. Close the ‘Cascades’ dialogue panel by clicking on the Continue icon (or by pressing

the Esc key). The changes that have been made are always saved (the Cancel option is not available in this case).

The dimensions of the dialogue panel can be adjusted by dragging the edges.

List of the tags of the nodes in a project (the nodes are the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ components), which have at least one protective component connected to them.

The outgoing protective components (the tags); the breaking capacities of these components are assessed with respect to the incoming components.

The incoming protective components; the function of these components influences the outgoing components assigned to them.

Tag of the node (the node is the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component) for which a cascade is being defined.

Transferring the circuit-breaker selected back to the outgoing circuit-breakers (or, double click the line selected).

Transferring the protective component selected to the incoming protective components (or, double click the line selected).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Examples (1 = incoming component, 2 = outgoing component):

A fuse used as a backup protection of circuit-breakers:

Circuit-breaker / circuit-breaker cascade:

If the protection at the incomer is formed by a series connection of a circuit-breaker and fuse, only the fuse is to be defined as an incoming component.

1

2 2

1

2

1

2 2

The FA3 incoming circuit-breaker serves as a backup protection of the FA4, FA5 and FA6 outgoing circuit-breakers if the short-circuit current does not exceed 30kA (the limiting value given by the manufacturer for this pair; in this case, the condition has been fulfilled: Ik3p''=27kA at NOD1).

During a short circuit, the FA3 and FA4 circuit-breakers may be subject to the short-circuit current stress Ik3p’’=14.6kA (this is more than their Ics=6kA); the incoming fuse will limit this current to the peak value of about 6.5kA, which is less than Ics* 2

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The incoming component is not a circuit-breaker – there is no cascade defined:

2

No cascade can be defined for node Rv2 (a switch disconnector is at the incomer); no circuit-breaker may be defined as an incoming circuit-breaker, each protective component must be assessed separately, without regard to the other protective components. It is not possible to take into account the influence of the protective components of other nodes.

All the components connected to this node must withstand this short-circuit current (that is, the short circuit immediately behind the component, not only the short circuit at the end of the line).

The FA8 incoming circuit-breaker serves as a backup protection of the outgoing circuit-breakers at node Rv1.

1

2

If the outgoing protective component might interoperate with the incoming protective component, a check is carried out to establish whether the anticipated cut-off short-circuit current is not greater than the limit specified by the manufacturer for the given pair. The fact that the circuit-breaker is assessed as a cascade is indicated by an information message.

2 2

If it is not possible that the outgoing protective component may interoperate with the incoming one, it is always assessed separately, without regard to the setting of the cascades (in this case, the FA2 and FA3 motor starters).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


‘Meshed’ network:

Evaluation of cascades: The incoming protective components are either fuses or fuses and circuit-breakers: The

limited short circuit current is computed for the incomers with fuses, and we add to this current the unlimited short-circuit current of the incomers with the circuit-breakers. The current computed in this way is causing stress to the outgoing component. The interoperation of the circuit-breakers is not assumed.

The incoming protective components are circuit-breakers (two or more): The interoperation of the circuit-breakers can not be assessed, each protective component is evaluated separately, without regard to the setting of the cascade.

The incoming protective component is a circuit-breaker: A test is carried out to establish whether it is possible that the incoming component and the outgoing component may interoperate. If it is possible that they may interoperate, the assessment is carried out to establish whether the assumed cut-off short-circuit current is not greater than the limit specified by the manufacturer for the given pair. If it is not possible that they may interoperate, each of the circuit-breakers is assessed separately – they do not influence one another.

Warning: Please, pay close attention to the defining of cascades, in particular in ‘knotted’ networks. Incorrect determination of the incoming components may result in wrong conclusions. If you are not sure, do not set any incoming component.

1

2

1 2 2

2 2 2 2 2

1 1

Node Rv1a: It is not possible to determine generally what an incomer is and what an outgoer is – no incoming component has been set, each component is assessed separately.

Node Rv1: In this configuration, it is possible to assume: two incomers = two incomingcomponents. However, other alternatives are also possible. Proceed with heightened caution!

Node Rv2: two incomers = two incoming components

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


14.4.2 Selectivity The aim of securing selectivity is to ensure that, in case of short-circuit or overload, only the protective device closest to the fault point will trip and the rest of the installation will remain operational (for more details see Chap.4.4). Selectivity of two protective devices - incoming (1) and outgoing (2) can be evaluated, on one hand, by comparing their tripping characteristics (see Chap.15) and, on the other hand, with a special function that evaluates selectivity based on selectivity tables specified in the power circuit-breaker catalogue. The latter option is addressed in this Chapter. Selectivity – comparing two circuit-breakers selected from the database This function allows you to evaluate selectivity of two circuit-breakers on the basis of selectivity tables independently on the wiring diagram edited. There is no need to make drawings, you can just select two devices from the database and the selectivity is then showed, accompanied by the relevant comments.

1. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. In the list of computational algorithms under the All calculations group, double click on the line called Selectivity (comparison of two circuit-breakers selected from the database).

2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the Database button to select an incoming circuit-breaker.

3. Click on the Database button to select an outgoing circuit-breaker.

4. The combination of the selected circuit-breakers will be searched in the selectivity tables, and the result will be displayed, accompanied by the relevant comments (limiting conditions, where relevant).

5. Click Close to close the dialogue panel. Selectivity – comparing circuit-breakers in a project This function allows you to evaluate selectivity of circuit-breakers connected to a single node constituted by the “Switchboard trunk” component.

1. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. In the list of computational algorithms under the All calculations group, double click on the line called Selectivity (comparison of circuit-breakers in the project).

Selection of the incoming circuit-breaker from the database.

Selection of the outgoing circuit-breaker from the database.

Result – selectivity evaluation based on the selectivity tables specified in the power circuit-breaker catalogue.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2. If no cascades were defined for the project, a dialogue panel will open requesting the user to specify their definition (see Chap.14.4.1). An incoming circuit-breaker must be defined for every node where the line splits (a node constituted by the “Switchboard trunk” component). For radial networks, cascades are defined automatically.

3. Where the cascades have already been defined, a dialogue panel with the results is displayed. All incoming circuit-breaker – outgoing-circuit breaker pairs are examined for every node where the line splits (a node constituted by the “Switchboard trunk” component):

4. Click on the Close icon or press Esc to close the dialogue panel.

Close the dialogue panel.

Print the list with results.

Interchange cascade settings (determination of the incoming circuit-breaker).

Comments on the results (limiting conditions, where relevant).


_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


14.5 Displaying impedances in network nodes The function allows you to view impedances in the particular network nodes, namely the positive-sequence and zero-sequence components, and the impedance of the short-circuit loop Zsv for one-phase short circuit. They can be shown optionally either in the form of absolute values or complex numbers, depending on the set Options (see Chap. 21.4). The displayed impedances are not corrected by any coefficients and can be used as input data to solve the connected IT networks.

1. We assume that the network wiring diagram (topology) has been defined and all network components have been dimensioned.

2. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. Double click on the line called Show impedance in network nodes in the list of computational algorithms under the All calculations group.

3. The calculation will be performed and the impedance values will be displayed in the wiring diagram. This diagram can be printed out (see Chap. 18), or it is possible to draw a list of components with the calculation results and print it out then (see Chap. 18), or to export it in a data file (see Chap. 19).

Z1 - impedance in the given network node, positive-phase sequence component (absolute value).

Z0 - impedance in the given network node, zero-phase sequence component (absolute value). For definition of the positive and zero-phase sequence component of impedance see Chap. 3.4.

Zsv - impedance of the fault loop for a 1-phase short circuit as defined by IEC 60364-4-41 (no coefficient applied).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Display of the real and the imaginary impedance components activated (see Chap. 21.4):

Notes:

The specified impedance values apply for the conductor temperature equivalent to the ambient temperature.

The shown impedances represent values determined by calculation, which are not adjusted by any coefficients.

The specified impedance values of Z(1) and Z(0) can be used for further calculations (such as in the linked IT networks, isolated medical system, etc.)


Activate the display of the real and the imaginary components of impedances (show impedances as complex numbers),


14.6 Displaying the values of limit voltage drops, disconnection times and connected phases

The properties of maximum voltage drop in the network node with respect to the power supply voltage, the maximum voltage drop in the network branch and the maximum disconnection time of the protective device are set locally for every component. Their editing is possible either within the editing of every particular component (see Chap. 12.1) in batch (see Chap. 12.1.3). The entered values can be displayed to ensure a better orientation and transparency.

1. Click on the Calculation icon in the tool bar. Double click on the line called Show values of dUmax max. drops, … in the list of computational algorithms under the All calculations group.

2. The required values will be displayed in the wiring diagram. This diagram can be printed out (see Chap. 18), or it is possible to draw a list of components with the calculation results and print it out then (see Chap. 18), or to export it in a data file (see Chap. 19).

Positive-phase sequence component: real part, imaginary part, absolute value.

Zero-phase sequence component: real part, imaginary part, absolute value.

Fault loop for 1-phase short circuit: real part, imaginary part, absolute value

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Cable tag.

Cable type, number of conductors, phase cross-section (possibly + PEN cross-section if it is different from the phase cross-section).

Cable length.

Method of cable installation, code laid down by regulations (see Chap. 2.2.3-2.2.4).

Labeling of the connected phases in the branch: 3-phase connection: 4 dashes; 1-phase connection 2 dashes.

Maximum voltage drop in the network node.

The maximum voltage drop in this line.

The maximum disconnection time of the protective device.

Exact determination of the connected phase.

If the load is connected through one-phase, the connected phase is shown, as standard, as part of the type designation.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


14.7 Summary of variables related to the calculations Device parameters and general network parameters Ur V Generator: Nominal voltage Sr kVA Generator: Nominal power Xd'' % Generator: Subtransient reactance Un V Circuit-breaker: Nominal voltage Iu V Circuit-breaker: Nominal constant current Ics kA Circuit-breaker: Operating breaking capacity Icu kA Circuit-breaker: Limited breaking capacity Ir A Circuit-breaker: Overload release (see also Chap. 15.1) tr s Circuit-breaker: Tripping time expressed as X-times Ir (see also Chap. 15.1) Isd A Circuit-breaker: Delayed short-circuit release (see also Chap. 15.1) tsd s Circuit-breaker: Delay time of delayed short-circuit release (see also Chap. 15.1) Ii A Circuit-breaker: Instantaneous short-circuit release (see also Chap. 15.1) L M Cable: Length Un V Cable: Nominal voltage In A Cable: Nominal current (in air, 30°C) Tau s Cable: Heating time constant Icw(0.1s) kA Cable: Short-time withstand current 0.1 s R1 mW/m Cable: Active resistance, positive-sequence network X1 mW/m Cable: Inductive reactance, positive-sequence network R0 mW/m Cable: Active resistance, zero-sequence network X0 mW/m Cable: Inductive reactance, zero-sequence network Ta °C Cable: Ambient temperature - K.m/W Cable: Specific thermal resistance of earth k - Cable: User coefficient Un V Compensation: Nominal voltage Qn kVA Compensation: Capacitance reactive power Qcal kVA Compensation: Calculated capacitance reactive power Cn mF Compensation: Capacity (per 1 phase) Un V Motor: Nominal voltage Pn kW Motor: Nominal power eta - Motor: Efficiency In A Motor: Motor nominal current Is/In - Motor: Starting/nominal current ratio cosPhi - Motor: Power factor Ku - Motor: Utilization factor dUmax % Motor: Maximum voltage drop (in node constituted by a motor) Un V Fuse: Nominal voltage In A Fuse: Nominal current Icn kA Fuse: Breaking capacity L m Line – busbar system: Length Ta °C Line – busbar system: Ambient temperature

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Un V Line – busbar system: Nominal voltage In A Line – busbar system: Nominal current (in air, 30°C) Tau S Line – busbar system: Heating time constant Icw(0.1s) kA Line – busbar system: Short-time withstand current 0.1s R1 mW/m Line – busbar system: Active resistance, positive-sequence network X1 mW/m Line – busbar system: Inductive reactance, positive-sequence network R0 mW/m Line – busbar system: Active resistance, zero-sequence network X0 mW/m Line – busbar system: Inductive reactance, zero-sequence network Un V Supply network: Nominal voltage Sk'' MVA Supply network: Short-circuit power (3-phase short-circuit) Ik'' kA Supply network: Impulse short-circuit current (3-phase short-circuit) Sk1'' MVA Supply network: Short-circuit power (1-phase short-circuit) R1 W Supply network: Active resistance, positive-sequence network X1 W Supply network: Inductive reactance, positive-sequence network R0 W Supply network: Active resistance, zero-sequence network X0 W Supply network: Inductive reactance, zero-sequence network Un V Load: Nominal voltage In A Load: Nominal current Pn kW Load: Nominal power cosPhi - Load: Power factor Ku - Load: Utilization factor dUmax % Load: Maximum voltage drop (in node constituted by a load) Ur1 V Transformer: Nominal primary voltage Ur2 V Transformer: Nominal secondary voltage Sr kVA Transformer: Nominal power Intr A Transformer: Nominal current Pk kW Transformer: Short-circuit losses uk % Transformer: Short-circuit voltage Un V Switch-disconnector: Nominal voltage In A Switch-disconnector: Nominal current Icw(1s) kA Switch-disconnector: Short-time withstand current 1s Uph/Ud V/V Network: Voltage system (phase voltage / delta voltage) Uph V Network: Phase voltage UphCal V Network: Calculated phase voltage Ud V Network: Delta voltage RA W TT network: Total resistance of the earth wire and guard wire of exposed

conductive parts in the node where the short circuit occurred RB W TT network: Earth resistance of the source (node) centre Voltage drops and load distribution calculation Unode Voltage in the network node (absolute value) dUnode Voltage drop in the network node in [%] relative to the power source voltage dUnodeMax Maximum voltage drop in the network node in [%] relative to the power source voltage (limit

value defined by the user)

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


dUwl Voltage drop in [%] in the network branch, i.e. voltage drop in the respective wiring line dUwlMax Maximum voltage drop in [%] in the network branch, i.e. voltage drop in the respective wiring

line (limit value defined by the user) Inode Current consumed in the network node (absolute value) Inoder Active current consumed in the network node *) Inodex Idle current consumed in the network node *) Iwl Current flowing through the network branch (absolute value) Iwlr Active current flowing through the network branch *) Iwlx Idle current flowing through the network branch *) In Rated current of a network element in general Inf Nominal current of a protective device (circuit breakers, fuses) I2, I2f Conventional breaking current of circuit-breaker / fuse Inc Rated current of a line (cable, busbar system) InInst Cable nominal current with respect to the installation cosPhi Power factor in the network node TetaA Ambient temperature (with definition of cable installation) TetaOp Maximum operating ambient temperature (with definition of cable installation) Short-circuit calculation Ik3p’’ Initial impulse short-circuit current for 3-phase short circuit (effective value of the symmetric

alternating component at the moment of short-circuit occurrence, for remote short circuits identical with the effective value of the steady short-circuit current)

Ik2p’’ Initial impulse short-circuit current for 2-phase short circuit Ik2PE’’ Initial impulse short-circuit current for 2-phase short circuit against ground, current flowing into

the ground Ik2L’’ Initial impulse short-circuit current for 2-phase short circuit against ground, current flowing

between phases Ik1p’’ Initial impulse short-circuit current for 1-phase short circuit against ground Ik Initial impulse short-circuit current (in general) Ikm Surge short-circuit current (maximum instantaneous short-circuit current value allowed - height

of the first short-circuit current half-wave) Itr Tripping short-circuit current Ike1 Short-time withstand current 1s Ike01 Short-time withstand current 0.1s Ttr Disconnection time of the protective device (disconnection of the fault point from the power

supply) TtrMax Maximum disconnection time of the protective device (disconnection of the fault point from the

power supply; limit value defined by the user) Icu Nominal breaking capacity of the protective device (the device can disconnect this current

repeatedly without damage) Ics Limit breaking capacity of the protective device (the device disconnects the specified current,

however, it may be damaged). Icn Fuse breaking capacity Ikcas Breaking capacity of cascade circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker Icw01s Rated short-time withstand current, i.e. the current, which the equipment can transmit for the

period of 0.1 second without damage

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Icw1s Rated short-time withstand current, i.e. the current, which the equipment can transmit for the period of 1 second without damage

Io Limited short-circuit current behind fuse. Peak value of the short-circuit current, which is let through by the fuse

Impedances R1 Resistance of positive-phase sequence component system as viewed from the short-circuit point *) X1 Reactance of positive-phase sequence component system as viewed from the short-circuit point *) Z1 Impedance of positive-phase sequence component system as viewed from the short-circuit point *) R0 Resistance of zero-phase sequence component system as viewed from the short-circuit point *) X0 Reactance of zero-phase sequence component system as viewed from the short-circuit point *) Z0 Impedance of zero-phase sequence component system as viewed from the short-circuit point *) Rsv Fault loop resistance for one-phase short circuit *) Xsv Fault loop reactance for one-phase short circuit *) Zsv Fault loop impedance for one-phase short circuit *) *) In order to view the active and idle components of currents and impedances, you need to enable

this function in the Options (see Chap. 21.4).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


15. Tripping Characteristics _______________________________________________ The module designed for working with the tripping characteristics is a module associated with the xSpider software. It can be used both on a fully separate basis independently of the network project as well as in combination with the currently edited project. The module allows you to:

Select devices from the database, display tripping characteristics of protective devices with respect to release setting, read the disconnection time and assess selectivity;

Display the ampere-second heating characteristics of cables with a view to the cable installation method and the ambient temperature; assign a protective device to the cable in order to ensure cable protection in the rated operating state as well as under overload;

Display the tripping characteristics of protective devices and cables from the currently edited project; option to adjust the setting of releases – changes are transferred back into the project;

Save sets of characteristics independently of the network project, print to printer. Module launch: select the Tripping Characteristics item from the Tools drop-down menu or click on the Tripping Characteristics icon in the tool bar. The module can be launched also in a situation when no network project is activated. The basic module screen:

Values of current or time, as the case may be, corresponding to the current position of the mouse pointer.

Window size can be changed by dragging the corners.

Tools for window handling (maximize, close).

Values corresponding to the clicked points in the chart and difference between points (right click to delete the points).

Tool bar – set of functions for module operation.

Tripping char. of the protective device

Ampere-second char. of the cable

3 lines above the chart are available for tags.

Points clicked by the left button to determine the values.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


15.1 Plotting the characteristics of circuit breakers from the database The module of tripping characteristics enables the user to select a protective device from the database independently of the currently edited network project and to plot its tripping characteristic with respect to release settings.

1. We assume that the module of tripping characteristics has already been activated (see Chap. 15). 2. Click on the Insert Circuit Breaker… icon in the tool bar. 3. The circuit-breaker database explorer is activated. For description of the database

explorer see Chap. 16.1. Select the device, the characteristic of which you would like to be plotted and click Insert.

4. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the tag, curve color and release settings:

5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The tripping characteristic is plotted in a chart. The

curve color, tag and release settings can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 15.5). Notes:

Line characteristics are given for all the circuit-breakers.

For large circuit-breakers, the behaviour of the characteristics, after the Isd release, possibly Ii release has acted, is somewhat simplified and is replaced with polylines.

Identification of the parameters of releases:

Parameter Previous identification (NZM 7,10)

New identification (NZM 1-4, IZM, etc.)

Overload release (thermal, overcurrent release), L-curve Ir Ir

Tripping time, as an X-multiple of Ir tr tr

Short-circuit release, delayed, S-curve Irmv Isd

Short-circuit release delay tv tsd

Short-circuit release, non-delayed Irm Ii

Setting of releases, only those parameters can be set, which are allowed to be changed for the given type of the release.

Concrete value, to which the respective release is set.

Curve color setting.

The currently set curve color.

Tag identifying the curve in the chart. Any text can be specified.

Tag position; number of the line above the chart, where the tag will be placed.

A component inserted directly from the database has no linkage to the wiring diagram.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Selections of the tr switch disconnector and of the I2t function:

Selection Meaning

L: tr=ON tr = according to the selection

L-curve – the overload release (thermal, overcurrent release) switched on; the tr value (tripping time as an X-multiple of Ir) set according to the selection

L: tr=OFF tr = infinite value

L-curve – the overload release switched off (thermal, overcurrent release); the tr setting (tripping time as an X-multiple of Ir) ignored (tr = ∞)

L: I2t L-curve – the overload release switched on (thermal, overcurrent release); the tr value (tripping time as an X-multiple of Ir) set according to the selection, inclination of the curve according to the I2t function

L: I4t L-curve – the overload release switched on (thermal, overcurrent release); the tr value (tripping time as an X-multiple of Ir) set according to the selection, inclination of the curve according to the I4t function

S: I2t=OFF S-curve – short-circuit release, the I2t function switched off

S: I2t=ON S-curve – short-circuit release, the I2t function switched on

L: tr=OFF; S: I2t=OFF

L: I4t; S: I2t=OFF

L: I2t; S: I2t=OFF L: I2t; S: I2t=ON

L: I2t; S: I2t= OFF

S-curve (short-circuit release)

L-curve Overload release (thermal, overcurrent release)

L: tr=OFF; S: I2t=OFF

L: tr=ON; S: I2t=OFF

L: tr=ON; S: I2t=ON

IZM circuit breakers, -U, -D releases NZM circuit-breakers, -VE release

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


15.2 Plotting the characteristics of fuses from the database

1. We assume that the module of tripping characteristics has already been activated (see Chap. 15). 2. Click on the Insert Fuse… icon in the tool bar. 3. The fuse database explorer is activated. For description of the database explorer see

Chap. 16.1. Select the device, the characteristic of which you would like to be plotted and click Insert.

4. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the tag and the curve color:

5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The tripping characteristic is plotted in a chart. The

curve color and the tag can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 15.5).

15.3 Plotting the characteristics of cables from the database The module of tripping characteristics enables the user to select a cable from the database independently of the currently edited network project and to plot its ampere-second heating characteristic with respect to its installation method and the ambient temperature. In combination with the tripping characteristics of protective devices, it is then possible to assess the cable overload protection.

1. We assume that the module of tripping characteristics has already been activated (see Chap. 15). 2. Click on the Insert Cable… icon in the tool bar. 3. The cable database explorer is activated. For description of the database explorer see

Chap. 16.1. Select the cable, the characteristic of which you would like to be plotted and click Insert.

4. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the tag, curve color and cable installation method (the installation method limits the current-carrying capacity of the cable; only the typical and most frequently used installation methods are available):





_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The characteristic is plotted in a chart. The curve color, tag

and the cable installation method can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 15.5).

Note: Line characteristics are specified for all circuit breakers.

Settings of the method of cable installation, grouping, ambient temperature and the user coefficient. These data limit the current-carrying capacity of the cable (for more details see Chap. 11.7).





Cable overload protection IS ensured.

Cable overload protection IS NOT ensured (for details see the theoretical introduction, Chap. 2.3).

Recap of the currently set method of cable installation, grouping, ambient temperature and the user coefficient.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


15.4 Plotting the characteristics of circuit breakers/fuses/cables taken over from the network project

The module for working with the tripping characteristics allows you to take over information about the diagram components from the currently edited network project and to display any combination of the tripping characteristics. Thus it is possible to assess the selectivity and cable overload protection or to fine tune the required settings, as the case may be.

1. We assume that the network, from which we want to take over the characteristics, is open and set as the currently active project (see Chap. 20.2 and 10.1).

2. We assume that the module of tripping characteristics has already been activated (see Chap. 15). 3. Click on the Insert Device/Cable from Network Project… icon in the tool bar. 4. A list of protective device / cable pairs will be displayed, which are available in the

current network project. Double click on the line with the device, the characteristic of which you want to see.

5. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the curve color and the tag position first for the protective device and then for the cable. It is also possible to edit the settings of the circuit-breaker releases and the cable installation method.

Type and tag identifying the curve in the chart. Taken over from the network project; changes are not recommended.

Cable type. Circuit-breaker or fuse type.

Cable tag. Circuit-breaker or fuse tag


Not a cable, but a busbar system is connected behind this circuit breaker; the ampere-second heating characteristic cannot be displayed for busbar systems, therefore, only the circuit breaker is specified.



Settings of the releases of the protective component, which have been taken over from the network project; it is possible to carry out correction of the settings, the changes will be transferred back into the network wiring diagram. See the notes at the end of Chapter 15.1 as well.

Cancel means that the circuit-breaker characteristic will not be inserted (but the cable characteristic set in the following step can be inserted).

Dialogue for protective device (circuit breaker or fuse).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. The curves will be plotted in a chart. Once again, the list of protective device / cable pairs will

be displayed, which are available in the current network project. 7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you enter all required characteristics. In order to maintain

transparency, it is not recommended to insert a higher number of curves into one chart. 8. Click on the Close button to exit the list of protective device / cable pairs.

Notes:

The curve color and the tag can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 15.5).

The settings of circuit-breaker releases or cable installation methods, as the case may be, can be modified at a later point in time (see Chap. 15.5).

A curve can be erased from the chart (see Chap. 15.6).

The set of curves can be saved completely independently of the network project (see Chap. 15.8.1). Any arbitrary number of characteristics sets can be created for one network.

A set of characteristics created by its transfer from a network project can be supplemented with characteristics of protective devices and cables inserted freely from the database (see Chap. 15.1-15.3).

15.5 Editing the properties of an already plotted characteristic

1. We assume that the module of tripping characteristics has already been activated (see Chap. 15) and that at least one curve is plotted in the chart.

2. Select the Properties item from the Components drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

3. A list of components will be displayed, the characteristics of which are shown in the chart. Double click on the line with the component, the characteristic of which you want to edit (select the characteristic based on the tag or type of the pertinent component or according to the curve color - the colored square in the right column next to the type designation).

Dialogue for cable.

Type and tag identifying the curve in the chart. Taken over from the network project; changes are not recommended.

Curve color setting. The currently set curve color. The program automatically offers the same color as for the protective device. A change is recommended.

Tag position; number of the line above the chart, where the tag will be placed. It is automatically increased with respect to the protective device.

Settings of the cable installation, which have been taken over from the network project; correction of the settings can be carried out (see Chap. 11.7), the changes will be transferred back into the network wiring

Cancel means that the cable characteristic will not be inserted (but the circuit-breaker characteristic as set in the previous step will be inserted).

Information about the linkage to the wiring diagram (saying whether the changes carried out will or will not be transferred back into the network wiring diagram).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. A dialogue panel will open in the form identical to the one shown when inserting a

component from the database (see Chap. 15.1 - 15.3). The appearance of the dialogue panel depends on the component type. The tag, tag position and curve color can be edited for all components. For protective devices, the release settings can be modified (where possible in view of the respective component). In addition, an Apply button is available to view the impact of the parameter change on the curve, without having to leave the dialogue panel. For cables, the method of installation, grouping, ambient temperature and the user coefficient can be modified. Attention: In case of cables, where a component was taken over from a network project, these modifications will not be reflected back in the wiring diagram.

5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The performed changes will be reflected in the chart immediately. Now go back to the list of components.

6. Repeat steps 3-5 until you edit all desired characteristics. 7. Click Close to exit the list of components, the characteristics of which are shown in the chart.

15.6 Erasing an already plotted characteristic from the chart


2. Select the Erase item from the Components drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

3. A list of components will be displayed, the characteristics of which are shown in the chart. Double click on the line with the component, the characteristic of which you want to erase (select the characteristic based on the tag or type of the pertinent component or according to the curve color - the colored square in the right column next to the type designation).

4. The characteristic will be erased from the chart. Now go back to the list of components. 5. Repeat steps 3-4 until you erase all desired characteristics. 6. Click Close to exit the list of components, the characteristics of which are shown in the chart.

15.7 Printing the sets of characteristics to printer


2. We assume that information has been entered in the description field (title block) by using the Information about Project function (see Chap. 17).

3. Select the Print item from the File drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

Colored square, its color corresponds to the curve color.

Exit the properties editing mode.

Editing of properties of the selected component in the same dialogue panel as when inserting components from the database (see Chap. 15.1-15.3).

Component selected for further editing. Tip: Double click on the selected line = start editing.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. A dialogue panel will open, in which you set the required number of copies. You can also modify the print parameters (such as select color print):

5. A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the printer type and paper format (standard

A4 format is set as default). The dialogue panel appearance depends on the version of the Windows operating system used (for more details see the Windows operating system manual).

15.8 Working with files A set of characteristics can be continuously saved to a data file on your hard disk in order to keep the data for future editing. The created files are fully independent on the currently edited network project. All information is in a single file with the standard *.SPC extension and the name of the file is determined by the user All operations with the files can be carried out by using the functions from the File drop-down menu or by means of the icons in the tool bar.

15.8.1 Saving a set of characteristics to file The current state of a set of characteristics can be saved to a file located on the hard disk by means of the Save and Save As… functions from the File drop-down menu. When calling the Save function for the first time with no file name specified before, the user is required to enter the file name and directory (folder), where the file is to be saved. During the second and next calls of this function, all changes to the design are automatically saved to the data file, the name of which was entered during the first function activation. The current name of the edited file is shown in the top part of the Tripping Characteristics dialogue panel.

Setting the parameters for list generation and print (such as enabling the color print), for more details see Chap. 21.1.

Information about the currently set output device type, to which the characteristics will be printed.

Setting the number of copies. The number of copies specified here is never recorded in the print driver and, therefore, does not affect printing from other programs.

Changing the properties of the currently set output device type, to which the characteristics will be printed (changing the type, port, paper size, paper orientation, ...).

Always leave the value 1 here (the required number of copies was already set in the previous step).

Execution of the print to the currently set output device type.

Forced interruption of the function without print execution.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


When using the Save As … function, the user is always required to enter the file name and directory (folder), where the file is to be saved with every call of this function. In this manner it is possible, for instance, to save the current design to a file with different name, thus, copying the original design to be used for further editing. The name of the currently edited file is shown in the top part of the Tripping Characteristics dialogue panel.

The name of the edited file is shown in the top part of the Tripping Characteristics dialogue panel.

15.8.2 Loading (opening) files with sets of characteristics A previously created data file, which includes a set of characteristics, can be loaded by means of the Open function from the File drop-down menu. First of all, the system performs the default state settings - checks whether the currently opened design was saved. If this is not the case, it will generate a message asking about its saving (see Chap. 15.8.3). In the next step, the user is asked for the directory (folder) and the file name:

Setting the structure – format of the output file.

Name of the edited file

Files of the same type in the current directory (folder).

Setting the directory (folder), into which the file is to be saved.

Name of the file, to which the project is to be saved. The .SPC extension will be added automatically.

Moving one level higher in the directory (folder) tree.

Creating a new directory (folder).

Setting the method of representation of files in the currently open directory (folder) – either as icons or as a list.

Setting the structure – format of the opened file.

Files with the existing projects in the current directory (folder). Click on the file name you want to open.

Setting the directory (folder), from which the file is to be loaded.

Name of the file you want to open, the .SPC extension does not have to be specified.



_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The loaded file can be edited in any manner by using the tools of the Tripping Characteristics module associated with xSpider.

15.8.3 Creating a new set of characteristics If you would like to start editing a new set of characteristics = set the Tripping Characteristics module to its default state, use the New command from the File drop-down menu. First of all, the system checks whether the currently opened design was saved. If this is not the case, it will generate a message asking about its saving:

Depending on the user’s response, it will set the default state of the program (identical situation as if you exit the Tripping Characteristics module - see Chap. 15.8.6 and launch it again - see Chap. 15).

15.8.4 Exporting the sets of characteristics to BMP file format The image depicting the current state of the tripping characteristics set can be exported to a file in BMP format (bitmap, raster image). The image in this universal format can be then imported e.g. in the Microsoft Word text editor and alike.


2. By dragging its edges, set the dimensions of the chart window to obtain a suitable size. The image in the BMP file will have the same size as the chart window at the moment of its export.

3. Select the Export item from the File drop-down menu. 4. A dialogue panel will open (similar to that opening with the Save

function, see Chap. 15.8.1), in which you select the “Raster image (*.BMP)” as the format of the output file by choosing the respective option from the list of formats available.

5. Enter the file name and the directory (folder), into which the exported image is to be saved.

Calls the Save function automatically (see Chap. 20.1) in order to save the current state of the design to your hard disk. Afterwards it continues in the New function.

Does not save the current state of the design anywhere and continues directly in the New function.

Forced interruption of the function, nothing happens and it is possible to continue in further editing of the current project.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Click Save to close the dialogue panel. The image with the set of characteristics will be exported to the data file.

15.8.5 Exporting a set of characteristics to DXF file format xSpider allows you to export graphics to DXF (universal exchangeable format for CAD systems). This also makes possible the subsequent import of charts to CAD systems supporting DXF format (such as AutoCAD). Graphics breakdown to levels, colors and line types is supported. Basic information about the project is attached. Alternatively, the possibility of exporting the graphics to BMP (raster format) remains – see Chap. 15.8.4.


2. Select the Export item from the File drop-down menu (or press keyboard shortcut Ctrl+E).

3. A dialogue panel will open (similar to that opening with the Save function, see Chap. 15.8.1), in which you select the “DXF file (*.DXF)” as the format of the output file by choosing the respective option from the list of formats available. DXF is offered as default in standard.

4. Enter the file name and the directory (folder), into which the exported image is to be saved. 5. Click Save to close the dialogue panel. The chart will be exported to the data file. Provided

the export was completed successfully, the final message appears as follows:

Notes:

In Settings under the System tab, it is possible to define the DXF file compatibility with various AutoCAD versions (see Chap. 21.1). It is advisable to change the setting if you have difficulties with loading the created DXF file.

Output file format. Select the „Raster image (*.BMP)“ to export to BMP.

Name of the file, to which the image is to be saved. The file name with the set of characteristics is offered as default.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The full RGB system color range can be used in xSpider. When exporting to DXF, the colors are converted into ACI system. After loading the DXF file into the target program, the colors might not correspond precisely to the xSpider settings.

15.8.6 Ending the Tripping Characteristics module session If you would like to terminate your work with the Tripping Characteristics module, use the Exit command from the File drop-down menu or close the main module window by clicking on the X in the upper right corner. First of all, the system checks whether the currently opened design was saved. If this is not the case, it will generate a message asking about its saving (see Chap. 15.8.3). Afterwards it will terminate the Tripping Characteristics module and return you to the xSpider environment.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


16. Component Databases _______________________________________________ A database of standard components (generators, transformers, circuit breakers, fuses, switch-disconnectors, lines, motors, etc.) is included in the program. When creating the wiring diagram (topology), it is possible to use the component parameters from these databases. All databases are built as open-end system with the possibility of modifications and additions made by the user. The database explorer can be activated in two ways:

From the dialogue panel where the component parameters are set: 1. Click on the Database button in the dialogue panel where you define the component

parameters when inserting or editing it. The database explorer corresponding to the given component type is activated automatically.

From a separate function: 1. Select the Database item from the Tools drop-down menu or click on the

corresponding icon in the tool bar. The option is accessible also when no network project is activated.

2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the database to be edited and click OK (databases are different depending on the component type):

16.1 Database operation - component selection Components are divided into logical groups and subgroups according to their function and properties and are arranged into a tree structure database. Databases were created based on the available documentation (IEC, national standards, manufacturer data) and do not necessarily have to cover the needs of all users. For such cases, the program offers the option of user-defined database modifications (see Chap. 16.2). The principle of component search in the database is explained in the following example: You need to find the device: Miniature circuit breaker, B char., 16 A, 3-pole, 6 kA breaking capacity.

1. We assume that some network project is activated (see Chap. 10.1). You would like to insert the Circuit Breaker with the given parameters in this project.

2. Click on the Circuit-breaker icon in the tool bar. Click the position of the circuit-breaker symbol in the network wiring diagram (for more details see Chap. 11.9). A dialogue panel will open, in which you are required to enter the circuit-breaker parameters. Click on the Database button. By doing so, you activate the circuit-breaker database explorer.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3. Find the desired device type in the database tree structure. Search in the tree is identical to that in the tree of directories in the Windows Explorer:

An item beginning with the „+“ sign is rolled up (it includes additional sub-branches, which are not shown). To roll down the item menu (and to view its sub-branches) double click the respective item (or click on the „+“ sign).

An item beginning with the „-“ sign is rolled down (all its sub-branches are shown on the screen). To roll up the item menu double click the respective item (or click on the „-“ sign).

Click on any branch once to view more detailed information about the branch in the items on the right side from the tree.

Now you want to find your device - circuit breaker (B char., 16 A, 3-pole, 6 kA breaking capacity):

Double click on the „Modular circuit breakers, PL type“- the tree covered within this branch will roll down.

Double click on the „Circuit breakers, breaking capacity 6 kA, PL6 type“.

Double click on the „B characteristics“ branch

Click once on the „3-pole“ branch - now you are already located on the end sub-branch of the tree and the table of the available devices is shown on the right.

Select the suitable type (16 A) from the table - by means of the horizontal and vertical scroll bars it is possible to view the hidden parts of the table.

Click with your right mouse button on the data table. Select the Abbreviation Legend item from the pop-up context menu - a dialogue panel will open which contains explanations of meaning for the variable abbreviations used in the data table head.

By dragging the edge and the partition, it is possible to modify the size of the dialogue panel and its columns.

Selection of the komponent type from the tree of options. Tree control: double click on a branch = roll down/up single click on a branch = select the branch

Data table with specific types of components in the given branch.

The selected component, actions of other buttons relate to this component.

Insertion of the selected component in the network project.

End of work with the database without inserting any component in the project.

The dialogue panel size can be changed by dragging its edges.

User modifications of the data table, see Chap. 16.2.

User modifications of the database tree, see Chap. 16.2.

Scroll bar to view the hidden parts of the data table.

Double click on the selected line = Insert.

The window size can be changed by dragging the partition.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Right click on the database tree or the data table to activate the context menu, which includes the Abbreviation Legend for explanation of meaning of the variable abbreviations used in the data table header.

4. Double click on the selected line - by doing so you insert the device from the database into the

network project (all items in the dialogue panel will be set according to properties of the selected device). In order to insert the device, you can - alternatively - use the Insert button or the Insert item from the context menu activated by right clicking your mouse in the data table.

16.2 Database modifications by the user All databases are built as open-end system with the possibility of modifications and additions made by the user. It is possible to edit both the database tree as well as items in the data table. The part of the database supplied as standard together with the program (the so-called parent database) cannot be edited. However, it can be copied to the user-defined database part (the „User-defined“ branch) and here it can be modified in any way. The user shall be responsible for the correctness of the user-added data and calculations performed on the basis of these data. The databases are independent of the currently open network project and modifications in the database will remain saved even after you close down the program. Before you start to fill the database, we advise you to think over its structure very carefully. The following principles apply:

Components of the same type and same properties should be included in a single branch.

Do not mix different types of components within one branch (such as circuit breakers and residual current protective devices).

When defining the database tree, it is advisable to look for inspiration in the parent database tree.

The database tree can have the maximum of 10 branches.

The user database includes no graphics; it is not possible to attach any drawing, diagram etc.

1. Select the Database item from the Tools drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. In the subsequently opened dialogue panel, select the database to be edited and click OK. The description below refers to the circuit-breaker database. However, it applies accordingly to other databases as well.

3a. Creating a new branch in the database tree:

E.g. you need to add different (sub)branches to the „User-defined“ branch in order to obtain a tree with the configuration as shown above in the figure.

a) First of all, you create the „Circuit-

breakers, S series“ branch, which is on the same level as the „Circuit-breakers, A series“ branch. Double click on the „User-defined“ branch to roll down the tree. Select the „Circuit-breakers, A series“ branch (one click) - newly created branches are always inserted behind (under) the currently selected branch.

Nominal current up to 120 A

User-defined - Example 1

Nominal current up to 64 A

Circuit-breakeres, S series

Circuit-breakers, A series

Mot.starters

User-defined

New branches

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


b) Click on the Add button in the Tree Editing group. A dialogue panel will open, in which you type the name of the new branch (i.e. „Circuit-breakers, S series“ and set the level of the new inserted branch to Same (= the same level as the currently selected branch):

Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The new branch will be inserted.

Name (description) of the new inserted branch, text free of choice with max. 50 characters.

Level of the new inserted branch in relation to the currently selected branch.

Copying the currently selected line from the data table to clipboard.

Sorting the data table according to various criteria (description, type, ..)

Pasting the line of data from the clipboard to the data table behind the selected line.

Deleting the selected data line from the database

Editing the selected data line (data modification).

Insertion of a new data line in the database to the selected branch.

Deleting the selected branch from the database; all data included in the branch will be destroyed as well when the branch is deleted.

Insertion of a new branch in the database tree. The new branch will be inserted behind the selected branch and can be at the same or lower level

Modification of the description of the selected branch of the database

Parent database, neither the tree nor the data items can be edited.

User database, new branches can be added and data items can be inserted to every branch.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


c) Now add the „Nominal current …“ sub-branches, which are on the level being one lower. Select the newly inserted „Circuit-breakers, S series“ branch (one click).

d) Click on the Add button in the Tree Editing group. A dialogue panel will open, in which you type the name of the new branch (i.e. „Nominal current up to 64 A“ and set the level of the new inserted branch to One lower (= another/lower level behind the currently selected branch). Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The new branch will be inserted.

e) Select the newly inserted „Nominal current up to 64 A“ branch (one click). f) Click on the Add button in the Tree Editing group. A dialogue panel will open, in which

you type the name of the new branch (i.e. „Nominal current up to 120 A“ and set the level of the new inserted branch to Same (= the same level as the currently selected branch). Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The new branch will be inserted.

3b. Renaming a branch in the database tree: You need to rename the „User-defined“ branch to

„Switching devices“: a) Select the branch in the database tree, the name of which you want to change. b) Click on the Edit button in the Tree Editing group. A dialogue panel will open, in which

you type the new name of the branch. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The branch will be renamed. Note: the branch level cannot be modified by editing; the branch must be deleted and created again at the new desired level.

3c. Deleting a branch in the database tree: E.g. you need to delete the „User-defined - Example 1“

branch including all its sub-branches and including all data contained in the branch and the sub-branches. a) Select the branch in the database tree, which you want to delete. b) Click on the Delete button in the Tree Editing group. Due to the irreversible nature of the

performed operation, the system asks:

If you answer by clicking Yes, the selected branch will be deleted including all its sub-branches and including all data contained in the branch and the sub-branches. The effect of this operation cannot be undone in any manner.

4a. Inserting a new component in the database to a given branch: E.g. you need to add the device

„S-series circuit-breaker, 3+N pole, In=40 A, S40/3+N type“ in the „Circuit-breakers, S series“ - „Nominal current max. 63 A“ branch. a) Select the branch in the database tree, to which you want to insert the desired device. In

case this branch does not exist, you need to create it by following the instructions provided under 3a. It is advisable for this branch to be the end branch of the tree, but it is not a must.

b) Click on the Add button in the Data Table Editing group. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter all required data defining the component.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


c) Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The new device will be added to the end of the data table.

4b. Inserting a new device in the database to a given branch by copying an existing device: E.g.

you need to add the device „S-series switch-disconnector, 3+N pole, In=63 A, S63/3+N type“ in the „Circuit-breakers, S series“ - „Nominal current up to 64 A“ branch. As you can see all device parameters are identical with those of the device inserted in item 4a, except for the differing nominal current. In this manner it is also possible to copy items from the parent database in the „User-defined“ branch. a) Select the branch in the database tree, to which you want to insert the new device (in our

case the „Circuit-breakers, S series“ - „Nominal current max. 63 A“ branch). A list of already defined devices will be shown in the data table.

b) Select the device in the data table, which you want to copy. c) Click on the Copy button in the Data Table Editing group. The selected line will be

copied to clipboard. d) Select the device in the data table, behind which you want the line copy to be inserted. e) Click on the Paste button in the Data Table Editing group. The line will be pasted from

the clipboard into the data table behind the currently clicked line. f) Modify the data in the selected line - see procedure described in item 4c.

4c. Modifying data of an existing device in the database: E.g. you need to modify the copy

created by the procedure under item 4b: a) Select the branch in the database tree where the device is located, which you want to

modify. b) Select the device in the data table, which you want to modify. c) Click on the Edit button in the Data Table Editing group. The same dialogue will appear

as the one opening when defining a new device (see procedure under item 4a), with the current data about the edited device being pre-filled in the particular fields. These fields can be edited in any desired way. Modify the data. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The data will be recorded in the database. CAUTION: the data concerned will be changed in the database, however, the data in the already inserted device units used in the network project will not be edited !

4d. Deleting a device from the database:

a) Select the branch in the database tree where the device is located, which you want to delete. b) Select the device in the data table, which you want to delete.

The number of parameters varies depending on the component type (see Chap. 16.3); it is necessary to pay attention in particular to the units, in which the individual data are specified (V, A, kA, ...).

One of the offered options must be selected for properties encoded in the database. Other options cannot be added in the program environment.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


c) Click on the Delete button in the Data Table Editing group. The system will ask you whether you are sure you want to delete the selected device from the database. If you confirm the deletion, the device will be deleted from the database (CAUTION - it will not be deleted from the network project !!)

4e. Sorting currently displayed database tables. Sorting of the database contents can be done in

alphabetical order according to various criteria. The internal Windows algorithm is used, which distinguishes between lower-case and upper-case letters. In lower system versions, this algorithm sorts characters with Czech diacritics all the way to the end of the alphabet. a) Select the branch in the database tree, which contains the data table you want to sort (the

table must include at least two devices in order for the function to be of any use. b) Click on the Sort button in the Data Table Editing group. The system will ask you what

criterion should be used to sort the table. c) Select the required criterion and close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The table will be

sorted. The sorting remains saved permanently. Note: sorting of large tables can take a longer time if performed on slower computers.

5. Click Close to finish you work with the database of third-party equipment.

Note: Data files of the user-defined database of third-party equipment are located in the \DATA\ directory. We strongly recommend you to make a backup of this directory as not to lose the definitions in case of any system failure. For backup of the entire xSpider system installation see Chap. 8.3.

16.3 Structure of data tables for the individual component types The following data must be defined for the individual component types:

Generators

Transformers

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Cables

One of the offered options must be selected for properties, which are encoded in the database. Other options cannot be added in the software environment.

Busbar systems

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Circuit breakers

One of the offered options must be selected for properties, which are encoded in the database. Other options cannot be added in the software environment.

The code of Ics/Icu list for various voltages: reference to the table of breaking capacities for various voltages in the file Ic.DAT. If not specified, then the given values of Icu, Ics apply for all voltage levels up to Un.

Name of the file with the selectivity table: the file must exist, or it must be created by means of Windows tools (a text file). If not specified, the selectivity of the circuit-breaker/fuse cascade cannot be determined. Code for cascade circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker assessment can be written, delimited by semicolon character.

Name of the file with the tripping characteristic: the file must exist, or it must be created by means of Windows tools (a text file; the time in one column, the current in the other column; the column width is fixed).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Fuses

Name of the file with the tripping characteristic: the file must exist, or it must be created by means of Windows tools (a text file; the time in one column, the current in the other column; the column width is fixed).

Name of the file with the limiting characteristic: the file must exist, or it must be created by means of Windows tools (a text file; the anticipated short-circuit current Ik in one column, the limited short-circuit current Io in the other column; the column width is fixed). If not specified, the limited short-circuit current cannot be calculated.

Motors

Compensation condensers

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


17. Information about Project, Title Block _______________________________________________ By means of the Information about Project function, you can set the basic information about the processed project, which will be in turn shown in the title block (description field) attached to the drawing of the network wiring diagram as well as to printed lists.

1. Select Information about Project from the File drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter data in the

respective fields step by step:

3. Click OK. The entered data will be recorded in the system. When printing the network wiring diagram (see Chap. 18), lists (see Chap. 18) and tripping characteristics (see Chap 15.7) to a printer, a title block filled with the data specified here will be printed on the bottom of every page. When exporting the lists in a data file (see Chap. 19), the data concerned are shown in the file header.

Notes:

The entered data can be modified by activating the Information about Project function again.

The function is called automatically prior to the first saving of a project to file on the hard disk, i.e. prior the first activation of the Save function (Chap. 20.1) and prior to every activation of the Save As function (Chap. 20.1).

An example of the title block printed in the bottom right corner of the drawing with the network wiring diagram:

Project identification. Project identification number. Date of design preparation. Name of the design author. Note to the design, any text can be specified.

Name of the company is shown here, which was granted the licence to use the program. Modification of the text is possible under Options (see Chap. 21.6).

Identification of the network type and the voltage system (see Chap. 11.1).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


18. Printing the Results to Printer _______________________________________________ The program allows you to print, on one hand, the wiring diagram (topology) including the results of the last performed calculation and, on the other hand, the lists of network components. General setting of printouts is determined by the Options function (see Chap. 21.1).

18.1 Print preview

1. Select the Print Preview item from the File drop-down menu or click on the corresponding icon in the tool bar.

2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you specify what printout you want to be shown in the preview (list of components, image). Then click OK. The selected list will be shown in a separate window.

Preview of the network wiring diagram has no sense because it is displayed in the project window.

Setting for the parameters of list generation and the print, for more details see Chap. 21.1.

Information on the last performed calculation, the results of which are shown in the network wiring diagram.

The list of all components in the network project will be displayed together with specification of their main parameters (tag, type and main electrical parameters defining the component).

The list of all components in the project network will be shown together with the results of the last performed calculation.

Identification of the last performed calculation.

Calculation results or the main electrical parameters of the component; for explanation of meaning of the variable see Chap 14.6.

The window size can be changed by dragging its edges.

The column width can be changed by dragging the partition.

Indication of error components, which did not comply with some of the checks; for more details see Chap. dealing with the respective calculation (see Chap. 14.3, 14.4).

Close window.

Setting for the number of copies to be printed. The number of copies specified here is never recorded in the print driver and, therefore, does not affect printing from other programs.

The table of cables of the network project, with the cable parameters (where from, where to, length, installation, specification), will be displayed.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3. Close the window with the list by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the window or by pressing Esc.

Note:

The component list can be sorted either according to the component type (see the drawings above) or according to the individual branches (in such a way that the components of each branch come one after another; for example: branch-1: trunk – circuit-breaker – cable – load, branch-2: trunk – circuit-breaker – cable – trunk, etc.) – see the Program Settings function, Chap. 21.1.

List of all the components comprised in a network project; the main parameters of the components are also included.

The main electrical parameters that define a component

The current settings of the individual parameters are displayed for circuit-breakers with an adjustable release.

Table of cables that are comprised in a network project; the main parameters of the cables are included as well.

Tag of the component connected at the end of the cable

Tag of the component connected at the beginning of the cable

Tag of the cable

Type identification of the cable; the number in front of the bracket is the number of parallel branches (if the number is greater than 1).

Code of the cable installation method according to the IEC 60364-5-523 standard.

The number of parallel branches + the number of the other circuits in the grouping (if the total number is greater than 1).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


18.2 Printing lists to printer


2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you specify what list you want to be printed (similarly to the print preview procedure - see Chap. 18.1, the first two top options); set the required number of copies and click OK.

3. A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the printer type and paper format - standard A4 format is set as default. The dialogue panel appearance depends on the version of the Windows operating system used (for more details see the Windows operating system manual).

Notes:

The lists are always printed in black and white


Modify the length of a page (number of lines per page), the size of the left page margin and the font height to be used for printing the lists,

Modify the component sorting in the lists.

The title block (description field) is shown at the bottom of every sheet. The data to be used in this title block must be entered prior to starting the print by using the Information about Project function (see Chap. 17).

18.3 Printing wiring diagrams


2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you specify what printout you want to be printed - select the item called Network wiring diagram with calculation results (see also Chap. 18.1; third option from top) and click OK.

3. Set the paper format which will be used for printing and specify manner in which the wiring diagram should be printed to this format. Set the required number of copies. The method of setting is similar to the standard CAD systems:

Information about the currently set output device type, to which the lists will be printed.

Changing the properties of the currently set output device type, to which the lists will be printed (changing the type, port, paper size, paper orientation, ...).

Execution of the print to the currently set output device type.

Forced interruption of the function without print execution.

Always leave the value 1 here (the required number of copies was already set in the previous step).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Full drawing area to the selected format - automatic reduction/enlargement so that the drawing area (area filled with the dotted mesh - grid) was drawn in full to the paper of the selected format; a printout example will be shown after clicking on Preview:

Automatically divide the drawing area in the selected format - the drawing area will be divided to several sections corresponding to the size of the paper inserted in the printer. Subsequently, you can specify the number of the page(s) to be printed (the first page from the selected range will be shown after clicking on Preview). This function is useful in cases when a large diagram is drawn in the A2-format drawing area for instance, but the connected printer allows you to print only to A4 format.

Currently connected output device (printer, plotter); paper size, to which the diagram will be printed (physically present in the output device).

Change of properties of the currently set output device type, to which the diagram will be printed (changing the type, paper size, paper orientation, etc.). Appearance of the dialogue panel depends on the employed version of the Windows operating system and on the driver type. Attention: here you modify the driver of the output device. The performed setting changes remain saved even after closing the program and may affect printing from other programs.

Specification of the print area, i.e. which part of the wiring diagram is to be printed to the selected paper and what the scale should be. For more details see text below.

Print preview – example of the selected area printout.

A3 drawing area printed to A4 format paper - portrait

(the image will be shrinked as required):

A4 drawing area printed to A4 format paper:

Paper physically inserted in the output device.

Dashed line – border of the utilizable drawing area on the paper (no printer or plotter is able to print all the way to the paper margin.)

Setting for the number of copies to be printed. The number of copies specified here is never recorded in the print driver and, therefore, does not affect printing from other programs.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Display - the print area is determined by the current image (as set by means of the Zoom function - see Chap. 13). If the Scaled to fit switch is enabled, the scale will be adjusted so that the specified area fills the available paper size; otherwise the diagram is printed in 1:1 scale.

A2 format drawing area.

A4 paper portrait is inserted in the printer physically. The drawing area will be divided into this format.

Drawing area division in the particular sheets, here in A4 format. The origin is in the upper left corner.

Page number.

Specification of the pages to be printed.

The preview will display the first page of those (here page 1 of 6).

Should the division of area to pages not suitable, it is necessary to specify the area for print by means of the window (see below).

Current image set by means of Zoom (see Chap. 13). Everything what is displayed in the project window (= on the screen) will be printed. The scale depends on the setting of the „Scaled to fit“ switch.

The network project window reduced here.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Window - after clicking on the Window button, you can specify the print area (similarly to the Zoom Window function, see Chap. 13.4). If the Scaled to fit switch is enabled, the scale will be adjusted so that the specified area fills the available paper size; otherwise the diagram is printed in 1:1 scale. Tip: by using the Options function, it is possible to modify the control over the selection window (either identical to AutoCAD with click-click - default setting, or identical to Windows with click-hold).

A4 paper – portrait supplied in the printer, „Scaled to fit“ switch enabled:

A4 paper – portrait supplied in the printer, „Scaled to fit“ switch disabled:

Current image set by means of Zoom All function (see Chap. 13.6).

The network window project reduced.

Second clicked corner.

First clicked corner of the selection window defining the area to be printed.

„Scaled to fit“ switch enabled. „Scaled to fit“ switch disabled.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Click on the Preview button and make sure that the printout meets your requirements. Click OK to close the preview window.

5. Click OK to close the dialogue panel for the wiring diagram print. The diagram will be drawn in the selected format as shown in the preview window.

Notes:


Select black-and-white or color printing.

Set colors of the particular wiring diagram components and set the font height.

The data to be used in the title block (description field) must be entered prior to starting the print by using the Information about Project function (see Chap. 17).

The printing procedure may fail on some drivers when printing a small view-port specified by means of the window with the Scaled to fit switch being enabled, which will result in large number of empty sheets being „printed“. In case the number of pages in the print queue exceeds the usual limit, an error message is generated offering the option to cancel the print:

Nevertheless, there are times when you need to cancel the printing process „manually“ by

emptying the print queue and restarting the printer.

18.4 Page Setup This function allows you to set the dimensions of the paper, on which the network wiring diagram will be drawn. This setup determines the dimensions of the drawing area to be used for the network wiring diagram in the project window.

1. Select the Page Setup item from the File drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you set the suitable size of your drawing area:

Standard paper formats = recommended dimensions of the drawing area

Possibility for user modifications of the drawing area dimensions; any dimension can be entered.

Cancel print.

Please pay attention to the information provided.

Continue in the print task. 84 empty pages are likely to be „printed„.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The drawing area dimensions will be adjusted accordingly. The position of components already inserted in the diagram must be then adapted by means of the Move function (see Chap. 12.2).

A4 format drawing area.

A3 format drawing area (after adjusting the page setup).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


19. Data Export _______________________________________________ The Export function enables you to export lists of components into a data file in a format suitable for text editors or spreadsheet processors. All graphics are exported to DXF (universal format for CAD systems), or BMP format (bitmap). Data tables can be exported to TXT format (universal format for text processors), TAB format (universal format for spreadsheet processors), or XLS format (for Excel).

19.1 Exporting component lists

1. Select the Export item from the File drop-down menu (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+E).

2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you specify what list you want to export (similarly to the print preview procedure - see Chap. 18.1, the first two top options) and click OK.

3. Another dialogue panel will open, in which you specify the output file format:

4. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. If you want the file to be exported to XLS format,

which uses MS Excel, the following information text will appear:

A dialogue panel will open (similar to that opening with the Save function, see Chap. 20.1), in

which you enter the file name and the directory (folder) where the exported file is to be saved.

File type suitable for spreadsheet processors. The individual columns of the list of pieces will be separated by tabulators. The file has a standard TAB extension.

File type suitable for text processors, such as T602, Notepad, Word etc. The individual columns of the list of pieces will be separated by spaces. The file has a standard TXT extension.

Direct export for Microsoft Excel spreadsheet processor; Microsoft Excel must be installed on the computer.

If you have MS Excel installed on your computer, click Yes. If the Excel application is currently running, please close it first and then click Yes.

If the MS Excel has not been installed yet on your computer, click No.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


5. Click Save to close the dialogue panel. The list will be exported to the file. Provided the export was executed successfully, the final message appears:

Notes: By the Options function (see Chap. 21.1) you can modify the component sorting in the lists. Information about the project is part of the exported file. These data to be entered prior to

starting the export procedure by the Information about Project function (see Chap. 17).

19.2 Exporting the network wiring diagram to BMP file format

1. By dragging its edges, set the dimensions of the project window to obtain a suitable size. Select a suitable zoom (see Chap. 13). The image in the BMP file will have the same size as the project window at the moment of its export and will include only the graphics you see in this window.

2. Select the Export item from the File drop-down menu (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+E). 3. A dialogue panel will open, in which you specify that you require a network wiring diagram

export (similarly to the print preview procedure - see Chap. 18.1) and click OK. 4. A dialogue panel will open (similar to that opening with the Save function, see Chap. 20.1),

in which you select the “Raster image (*.BMP)” as the format of the output file by choosing the respective option from the list of formats available.


Encoding and extension of the output file.



Name of the file, to which the list is to be exported. The name of the project file is offered as a preset value.



Setting the method of representation of files in the currently open directory (folder) –either as icons or as a list.

Name of the file where the list was exported, including the path.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Click Save to close the dialogue panel. The image will be exported to the data file.

Output file format. Select the “Raster image (*.BMP)” to export to BMP file format.



Name of the file, to which the image is to be saved. The name of the project file is offered as a preset value.




Project window. The BMP file image will be as large as the project window at the moment of its export and will contain only the graphics you can see in this window.

Contents of the BMP file.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


19.3 Exporting the network wiring diagram to DXF file format xSpider allows you to export graphics to DXF (universal exchangeable format for CAD systems). This also makes possible the subsequent import of the network wiring diagram including the calculation results to CAD systems supporting DXF format (such as AutoCAD). Graphics breakdown to levels, colors and line types is supported. Tags in the wiring diagram are exported as blocks. Basic information about the project is attached. Alternatively, the possibility of exporting the graphics to BMP (raster format) remains – see Chap. 19.2.

1. Select the Export item from the File drop-down menu (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+E).

2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you specify your requirement to export the network wiring diagram (similarly as with Print preview – see Chap. 18.1) and click OK.

3. A dialogue panel will open (similar to that opening with the Save function, see Chap. 20.1), in which you select the “DXF file (*.DXF)” as the format of the output file by choosing the respective option from the list of formats available. DXF is offered as default in standard.


5. Click Save to close the dialogue panel. The chart will be exported to the data file. Provided the export was completed successfully, the final message appears as follows:

Notes:

In Settings under the System tab, it is possible to define the DXF file compatibility with various AutoCAD versions (see Chap. 21.1). It is advisable to change the setting if you have difficulties with loading the created DXF file.

The full RGB system color range can be used in xSpider. When exporting to DXF, the colors are converted into ACI system. After loading the DXF file into the target program, the colors might not correspond precisely to the xSpider settings.

Output file format. Select “DXF file (*.DXF)” to export to DXF file format. The DXF format is offered as default in standard.

Name of the file, to which the image is to be saved. The name of the project file is offered as the default value.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


20. Working with Files _______________________________________________ A network project can be continuously saved to a data file on your hard disk in order to keep the data for future editing. All information about the project is in a single file with the standard *.SPI extension and the name of the file is determined by the user All operations with the files can be carried out by using the functions from the File drop-down menu or by means of the icons in the tool bar.

20.1 Saving your project to a file on the disk The current state of the network project can be saved to a file located on your hard disk by means of the Save and Save As… functions from the File drop-down menu. When calling the Save function for the first time with no file name specified before, the user is required to enter the file name and directory (folder), where the file is to be saved. During the second and next calls of this function, all changes to the design are automatically saved to the data file, the name of which was entered during the first function activation. The current name of the edited file is shown in the top part of the main window for xSpider application or in the top part of the project window. Every time the Save As… function is activated, the user is required to enter the file name and the directory (folder), where the file is saved. In this manner it is possible, for instance, to save the current design to a file with different name, thus, copying the original design to be used for further editing. The current name of the edited file is shown in the top part of the main window for xSpider application or in the top part of the project window.

Setting the structure – format of the output file.



Name of the file, to which the project is to be saved. The .SPI extension will be added automatically.

Moving one level higher in the directory (folder) tree. Creating a new directory (folder).


_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


20.2 Loading (opening) files with projects Fast access to the last edited files is possible through the list available at the end of the File drop-down menu. A previously created data file with a network project can be loaded by means of the Open function from the File drop-down menu. In the next step, the user is asked for the directory (folder) and the file name:

The loaded file is opened in a separate project window and can be edited any manner by using the xSpider tools.

20.2.1 Loading (opening) demo files A selected demo file supplied with the program can be loaded by means of the Open function from the File drop-down menu. Demos can be used as an initial point to solve a specific problem. The particular examples are described in Chap. 25.3.When clicking on the icon, a dialogue panel will open in the same form as when calling the Open function (see Chap. 20.2) with the only difference that the directory (folder) is always set there automatically, which contains the demo files. The loaded demo example is opened in a separate project window and can be edited any

Name of the edited file in the top part of the xSpider main window (the project window is maximized).

Name of the edited file in the top part of the project window.

Setting the structure – format of the loaded file.

Files with the existing projects in the current directory (folder). Click on the file name you want to open.

Setting the directory (folder), from which the file is to be loaded.

Name of the file you want to open, the .SPI extension does not have to be specified.



_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


manner by using the xSpider tools. We recommend that you save the modified example under a different name outside of the program directory structure (such as in the DOCUMENTS directory) - by means of the Save function, see Chap. 20.1. - in order to keep the demo file in its original form for further use.

20.3 Editing a new project If you want to start editing a new project, use the New Project command from the File drop-down menu. The new project is opened in a separate window and can be edited any manner by using the xSpider tools. The default setting for the new project is given by the Options (see Chap. 21.1).

20.4 Ending the project editing operation If you want to terminate your project editing, click on the X in the upper right corner of the project window or use the Exit function from the File drop-down menu. First of all, the system checks whether the currently opened design was saved. If this is not the case, it will generate a message asking about its saving:

Calls the Save function automatically (see Chap. 20.1) in order to save the current state of the design on your hard disk. Afterwards it continues in the Exit function.

Does not save the current state of the design anywhere and continues directly in the Exit function.

Forced interruption of the function, nothing happens and it is possible to continue in further editing of the current project.

The directory (folder) with the demo examples is preset automatically.

Files with demo examples (for description of the examples see Chap. 25.3). Click on the file name you want to open.

Loading of the selected file.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


20.5 Ending the program session If you would like to terminate your xSpider session, use the Exit command from the File drop-down menu or close the main program window by clicking on the X in the upper right corner. First of all, the system checks whether all open projects were saved. If this is not the case, it will generate a message asking about their saving (see Chap. 20.4). Afterwards, the xSpider program will be closed down.

To exit xSpider click on the X and close the main program window

To end your editing session of the DEMO_ RadialNetwork project, click on the X and close the project window.

Window with the network project maximized.

Icons in the tool bar can be arranged in two rows on smaller screens with low resolution.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


21. Options _______________________________________________ The Options function allows you to set the global variables affecting the program behavior as a whole in an easy way by means of a dialogue panel. The particular setting features defined in the function are recorded in the system and maintained until their next change regardless of the edited project. The individual setting features are saved in the xSpider.INI file in the program root directory. The file may not be write-protected.

21.1 Graphics environment

1. Select the Options item from the Tools drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the System tab. A dialogue panel for the

user interface configuration appears:

The recommended default settings for controllers are shown in the figure.

Program behavior immediately after startup.

Setting of the Zoom Window control – either as in AutoCAD (click-click) or as in Windows (click-hold). Sensitivity setting for ZoomRealtime.

Setting of selection windows for MOVE, COPY, ERASE editing functions – either as in AutoCAD (click-click), or as in Windows (click-hold).

Restoration of the default position of floating windows can be used, for instance, when the window with the calculation results appears outside of the screen (suitable also when an external screen is disconnected from laptop).

Adobe Reader software is essential to view Help in the PDF format. After clicking on the button, the standard dialogue panel will appear as in the Open function, you should use it to find the executable file for Adobe Reader - AcroRd32.exe. Program installation is available on the installation CD-ROM or it can be downloaded for free from the Internet at www.adobe.com.

DXF format version according to the compatibility with the given AutoCAD version.

Setting to define how often the availability of new versions will be checked on the Moeller website. The check for availability of new versions and the software update can also be carried out manually at any time – see Chap. 8.3 and 8.4.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3. Click on the Page tab. A dialogue panel for the graphics environment configuration appears:

Print lists:

Number of lines per page represents the number of components from the list, which will be printed on one page, i.e. the total number of lines per page minus the header and footer line.

Left margin width in characters indicates the number of spaces between the left paper edge and the beginning of the first printed character on the line.

Font height in points indicates the font height in the printed version of the lists. The recommended value is 8. It is not advisable to use smaller values. If you decide to use a different font height, it is necessary to adjust the number of lines per page and the left margin width accordingly to ensure that all data are printed on the paper. The paper size, format and orientation are set not sooner than during the actual print by modifying the printer properties (the Change button in the Print dialogue panel - see Chap. 18.2 and 15.7). The table below indicates examples of the recommended settings:

Format Orientation Lines per page Left margin Font height

A4 portrait 80 4 8 A4 landscape 18 2 12 A3 portrait 36 2 12

Sort the lists according to branches - if you tick this option, the list of network components with the calculation results and the list of network components with their parameters will be sorted in such manner that the components be listed successively after one another in every branch (e.g.: branch-1: busbar-circuit breaker-cable-load; branch-2:busbar-circuit breaker-

Default page setup (dimensions of the drawing area) for new projects. See also Chap. 18.3.

Snap size cannot be changed (corresponds to the dimensions of schematic symbols).

It is not recommended to change the grid size (distance between dots filling the drawing area) – except for large drawing areas of A1, A0 format.

Page setup for the currently edited project, see Chap. 18.3.1

Setting of parameters to print lists and tripping characteristics. See below.

Background colors of the project window, color of the frame and the title block.

Grid display activation (it is advisable to disable it when exporting graphics to BMP format).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


cable-busbar, ...). In case this option is not ticked, the lists will be sorted according to component types (all power sources first, then all circuit breakers, then cables, …).

Print to printer in colors - if you tick this option, the network wiring diagram and the tripping characteristics will be printed in color provided you have a color printer. In case you do not tick this option, all printouts will always be black and white. The component lists are always printed in black and white regardless of this switch setting.

Print the path to the data file – if you tick this option, the name of the file containing the project, including the complete path to the file’s directory (folder), will be included in the information about the project when the lists and tripping characteristics are printed and when the lists are exported. If this item has NOT been ticked, only the name of the file, without the path, is printed.

4. Set the individual items as desired. 5. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The entered setting features will be recorded in the

system and will remain saved even after program termination.

21.2 Wiring diagram

1. Select the Options item from the Tools drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the Diagram tab. A dialogue panel with

the settings for the network wiring diagram properties appears:

Color settings for the particular network wiring diagram parts. It will be reflected in all projects, i.e. both the existing as well as the newly created ones.

Setting of the initial tag position in relation to the component insertion point. The origin of the coordinate system is in the upper left corner, the positive direction of the Y axis is downwards.

For parameter entry, see below.

Font height settings for the texts used in the network wiring diagram. It will be reflected in all projects, i.e. both the existing as well as the newly created ones.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Set the component parameters immediately after their insertion in the diagram. If you tick this option, you will be required to enter the electrical parameters of a component immediately after inserting the component symbol (such as a circuit breaker) into the diagram. In case this option is not ticked, only the component symbol will be inserted and the electrical parameters will have to be added later by means of properties editing.

Require automatic dimensioning as default value. If this option is selected, the Dimension automatically switch will automatically be activated when a component such as line – cable, line – busbar system, circuit-breaker, fuse and switch-disconnector is connected (it is presumed that the component will be dimensioned automatically; the software is used predominantly in the design mode). If this option is not selected, the Dimension automatically switch is disabled when the above-specified components are inserted (it is presumed that the component will be dimensioned by the user; the software is used predominantly in the control mode).



21.3 Free graphics

1. Select the Options item from the Tools drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the Free Graphics tab. A dialogue panel

appears allowing you to set the default properties for a newly inserted free graphics (line, circle, rectangle, text):



21.4 Calculation

1. Select the Options item from the Tools drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the Calculation tab. A dialogue panel

appears with the settings of the computational algorithms:

The values set here determine the default properties of newly inserted free graphics, i.e. for instance: every new drawn line will be black, continuous, and thicker (but lines drawn previously will remain without any change).

Please pay attention to this information.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Show the real and the imaginary components … If you tick this option, the consumption currents in nodes and the currents in branches are shown as complex number following the calculation of the voltage drops and load distribution. In the opposite case, only the absolute values are shown. This setting also relates to the display of impedances.

Show admittance matrices… If you tick this option, the admittance matrices and other intermediate results will be shown for all calculations. In the opposite case, the intermediate results will not be shown.

Show the short-circuit current waveform… If you tick this option, the chart with the short-circuit current waveform is shown when calculating the 3-phase symmetric short circuit. In the opposite case, the chart will not be displayed.

Highlight unsuitable components… If you tick this option, then all components that did not comply with some check will be highlighted both in the wiring diagram and the list of network components with the calculation results. In the opposite case, the unsuitable components will not be highlighted in any way (this setting feature is intended for experts only).

Check coordination… If you tick this option, while checking coordination between protective device and cable both terms required by IEC 60364-4-43 will be considered and cable time-current heating characteristic and protective device tripping characteristic will be compared in addition also (recommended more accurate method - see Chap 2.3). In the opposite case, terms required by IEC will be checked only.

3. Set the individual items as desired. 4. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The entered setting features will be recorded in the system

and will remain saved even after program termination.

21.5 Automatic dimensioning

1. Select the Options item from the Tools drop-down menu.

Limit voltage drop setting. The values specified here will be used as default values when inserting a new component in the diagram.

For description of effects caused by different switch settings see below.

Setting of the limit disconnection time of the fault point from source. The values specified here will be used as default values when inserting a new component in the diagram.

Setting of the network type and voltage system, the values specified here will be used as default values for new projects.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the Auto Dimensioning tab. A dialogue panel appears allowing you to set the automatic dimensioning algorithm for the user-defined components:

Product series preference settings for circuit-breakers, fuses and switch-disconnectors: In case of parameter In case of equivalence of parameters, the higher ranking type series circuit-breaker is used. Example: The product-series sequence is set as follows: PLS6, PLSM, PLHT … By preference,

PLS6 type-series circuit-breakers (Icn=6kA) will be used wherever possible; only in case of unsuitable breaking capacity, PLSM (Icn=10kA), or PLHT (Icn=25kA) circuit-breakers will be used.

The product-series sequence is set as follows: PLSM, PLHT, PLS6 … By preference, PLSM type-series circuit-breakers (Icn=10kA) will be used even if the expected short-circuit current is lower than 6kA; only in case of unsuitable breaking capacity, PLHT (Icn=25kA) circuit-breakers will be used.

Specification of some conductor parameters that will be assigned by the Dimension Automatically function to the components, for which the Dimension automatically switch was enabled and for which these parameters were not set when the component was inserted in the wiring diagram.

Required number of poles for protective and switching devices.

Preference settings for product series – determines the sequence, in which the individual types will be assigned during AutoDimensioning. For product series codes, see the Moeller product catalogue.

Specification of the standard (a set of typically used products), from which components will be chosen during automatic dimensioning.

Change of preference settings for product series.

Move the selected series up (higher preference).

Move the selected series down (lower preference).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




21.6 Changing the licence data

1. Select the Options item from the Tools drop-down menu. 2. A dialogue panel will open, in which you click on the Licence tab. A dialogue panel appears

enabling you to enter the licence data:



Possibility to enter new licence data (user identification, licence number and licence expiration date) by means of a dialogue panel identical to the one used during the first program initialization (see Chap. 9.1).

Current licence data.

Date of last check for availability of new versions on the Moeller website. The interval, in which the availability of new versions on the Moeller website is to be checked, can be set under the System tab (see Chap. 21.1). The check for availability of new versions and the software update can also be carried out manually at any time using the “Software Update from Website” (see Chap. 8.4) or “Software Update from Directory”(see Chap. 8.5).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


22. Help _______________________________________________ The Help Topics function from the Help drop-down menu launches Adobe Reader with the electronic version of this manual in PDF format. In order to ensure correct operation of this function, you must set the full path for the executable Adobe Reader file AcroRd32.exe by means of the Options function (see Chap. 21.1). If you do not have Adobe Reader installed on your computer yet, you can find its setup on the installation CD or you can download it from the Internet at www.adobe.com or at www.amsoft.cz.

22.1 Tip of the Day The Tip of the Day is a set of suggestions for working with the program. After installation, the window with a tip of the day is shown automatically at the program startup; a different tip is provided for every launch. The tip window can be displayed at any time by means of the Tip of the Day function from the Help menu.

Close the window with tips.

Move to the next tip. When the last tip has been shown, the whole series starts from the beginning.

Switch that determines whether the window with tips should be shown automatically at the program startup. This property can be also set in Options under the System tab.

Tip text.

Opening of a demo example – see Chap. 20.2.1; the demo example can be used as the initial point to solve a specific problem. For description of the demo examples see Chap. 25.3.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


23. About xSpider _______________________________________________ About xSpider … from the Help drop-down menu is a function designed to view information about the application - the xSpider system. The function can be used to determine the licence information.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


24. History of Versions _______________________________________________

1. Version 1.0, November 2001

The first beta-version of the system presented at the MSV Brno ‘01 Fair. The first live version of the system available for distribution from November 2001.

2. Version 2.0, May 2002

Beta-version of the system presented at the AMPER ‘02 Fair. Live version of the system available for distribution from May 2002.

New functions and computation options:

New possibility introduced for the IT and TT network design. New possibility introduced for the design of networks of various voltage systems up to 1000V (e.g. 400/230V,

690/400V and other) New design of 3-phase as well as 1-phase networks, accurate entry of the connected phase, load calculation for

the particular phases. Marking of the connected phases in the wiring diagram. New components - Switch disconnector and Compensation unit; fuses inserted as fuse switch disconnectors.

Calculation of power factor in the network nodes. Possibility of alternative entry of impedance values instead of the short-circuit capacity in case of power supply

from a supergrid. New feature for the entry of limit voltage drops „dU“ and disconnection time „tv“ of the failure point from the

power source locally for every component. Possibility of mass editing of the entered values. New option of displaying the impedance of the fault loop for 1-phase short circuit.

User interface:

General: Easier entry of the simple typical cases while maintaining the maximum variability and open-ended character. User operation adjusted to the standard CAD systems (AutoCAD) as much as possible.

New Undo function, new Redo function. Repeating of the last called function from the context menu activated by the right mouse button. New Group function: insertion of typical component groups (such as power supply through transformer, a

motor circuit with circuit breaker…). New Stretch function: editing of the shape and position of line objects, tag position editing. Selection of items for editing possible (Copy, Move, Erase) through selection windows. Possibility of variable

behavior settings of the selection window according to AutoCAD or Windows standard. Possibility of multiple object copying with the subsequent automatic tag editing so that no duplicities occur

within a certain wiring diagram. Change in the default marking of lines to W (cables) and W-BUS (busbar systems). Printing of the component type designation in the network wiring diagram. Possibility to set the font color and height in the text of the network wiring diagram. Possibility to switch the Grid and Ortho modes on/off. Possibility to set the Zoom function behavior (AutoCAD or Windows mode, sensitivity setting). Free graphics now accessible through icons on the tool bar. Improved database explorer (display of units in the data table header, explanation of meaning of the data table

variables - activation by the right mouse button, possibility to change the size of the tree and the data-table windows

Automatic activation of new project after program launch. Tip of the Day was added.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Databases: Extension of the transformer database - the assortment of the most important suppliers (BEZ, ELIN, ESB, SGB)

was added. Extension of the generator database - the assortment of the most important suppliers (Caterpillar, MEZ) was

added. Extension of the cable database - Czech 5-wire cables were added, Tau values for the German cables were

completed. New database of Moeller switch disconnectors, changes in the circuit-breaker database. New database of compensation condensers (ZEZ Silko).

Print:

Substantial extension of wiring diagram print options (division of large format into several smaller ones, possibility to specify the printing area, print preview).

Correction of faults:

Fault in the installation program corrected - the installation can be now performed without troubles also into directories containing a space character in their names (e.g. ‘Program Files’).

Elimination of the identified problems.

3. Version 2.1, June 2003 General:

The 2.1 version does not in principle differ significantly from the 2.0 version. Its main benefit is the update and extension of databases and new design of the current-carrying capacity of cables with respect to their laying.

New functions and computation options:

A completely new design of entering the cable laying and calculation of the current-carrying capacity of cables with respect to their laying.

Possibility to enter the method of laying precisely according to the tables in IEC 60364-5-523 (all possible alternatives included in the standard are available).

For the selected method of laying, it is possible to enter the grouping ways precisely according to the tables in IEC 60364-5-523 (all possible alternatives included in the standard are available).

Possibility to enter the number of other circuits in the grouping and the ambient temperature. Possibility to enter the user coefficient, influencing the current-carrying capacity of cables and taking other

factors into account. By means of this coefficient, the user can solve also cases, which are not directly included in the tables in IEC 60364-5-523 (e.g. cables with the cross-section of 800 mm2 or non-standard laying).

Calculation of the current-carrying capacity of cables with respect to their laying precisely according to IEC 60364-5-523.

User interface:

New „Open Demo“ function, accessible from the „Tip of the Day“ window and from the main menu, makes the access to demonstrational examples easier. These demo examples can be used as a basis when solving a specific design problem.

Easier selection of the tripping characteristics to be edited/erased; selection from the list according to the curve color.

New design of Help: the complete electronic-version manual in PDF format is an integral part of the installation (including a theoretical introduction and description of the solved examples). The „Help“ function displays this manual using the Adobe Acrobat Reader software. Adobe Acrobat Reader (viewer of PDF format documents) is available for free and its installation is included in the installation CD-ROM.

Databases:

Cable database: Some type designations were modified according to the comments from users. Values were updated according to the available documentation. Extension of the database towards larger cross-sections. Cables with EPR and XLPE insulation and fire resistance up to 180 mins added.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Busbar system database: New busbar systems BD2-A and BD2-C up to 1200 A added.

Circuit-breaker database: Type designations of small circuit breakers were changed in connection with the changes in the F&G

assortment (circuit breakers CLS6, PL7, PLHT, motor starters Z-MS, protective switches with circuit breaker CKN, PFL7).

Update of sensitivity tables for miniature circuit breakers according to the available documentation. New types of circuit-breakers from the PMC series were added, replacing the older LCB line. New types of circuit breakers from the NZM 1, 2, 3 series were added. Update of the tripping characteristics was carried out for some types of the NZM 7,10,14 series circuit

breakers according to the available documentation. New types of circuit breakers from the IZM 1, 2, 3 series were added, replacing the older series of IZM 32,

40, 50, 63. Fuse database:

The allocation of the limiting characteristics for NH series fuses was checked. C-type cylinder fuses were added according to the available documentation.

Switch-disconnector database: Type designations of miniature switch-disconnectors were changed in connection with the changes in the

F&G assortment. New series of PSC switch-disconnectors was added, replacing the older HSD series. New series of switch-disconnectors N 1, 2, 3, 4; PN 1, 2, 3 were added. New series of switch-disconnectors IN 1, 2, 3 was added, replacing the older series IN 32, 40, 50, 63.

Print:

Possibility to define the number of copies prior to the print start, without the entry into the print driver. The number of copies set in this manner has no influence on printing from other applications.

Correction of faults:

Print: elimination of the problem arising when printing large formats on individual smaller sheets. Print: elimination of the problem arising when printing on color printers: not only the text, but also the line

objects are in colors now. Print: after printing out a wiring diagram, it is possible to print the tripping characteristics immediately without

any problems. Installation: correction of the problem arising when transferring user databases from the previous installation.

4. Version 2.1.21, September 2003 Circuit-breaker database:

NZM4 circuit-breakers added, NZM..-M, -S, -ME circuit-breakers added Update of tripping characteristics for NZM1,2,3,4 circuit-breakers according to the new catalogue valid as from

August 2003 General:

A variable licence system implemented, different for CZ, PL and other licensed users Adjustment in dimensions of some dialogue panels for the needs of other language versions

Corrections of errors:

Elimination of the false message indicating that there is no selectivity for circuit-breaker/fuse cascade in cases when no selectivity table is available for the respective fuse type

Wrong implementation of F-laying was corrected for files loaded from older versions (single-core cables distance clamps).

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


5. Version 2.2.05, June 2004 General:

In principle, the 2.2 version does not differ significantly from the 2.1 version. The main benefit consists in database update and the possibility to export graphics to DXF format.

New functions and computational possibilities:

The export of graphics to DXF was added (universal exchangeable format for CAD systems). Possibility of subsequent import of graphics (the wiring diagram with calculation results, tripping characteristic) to CAD systems supporting DXF format, such as AutoCAD. Graphics breakdown into levels, colors and line types is supported. Tags in the wiring diagram are exported as blocks. Basic information about the project is attached.

User interface:

Lists of nodes for calculation are now arranged in alphabetical order, which allows for an easier selection of the node to be used in the calculation (e.g. for calculation of 3-phase or 1-phase short circuit in a specific node).

The list of network components to be used to plot the tripping characteristic is now arranged in alphabetical order (according to the tag of the protection device), which allows for easier selection of the protection device / cable pair, which are to be used to plot the tripping characteristic.

Functions allowing the user to work with busbar systems are blocked. It is not possible to insert the component "Line - Busbar System"; access to the busbar system database is blocked. Previously designed projects containing some "Line - Busbar System" components can still be processed. Reason: the product group of enclosed busbar trunking systems was sold to Siemens.

Databases:

Circuit-breaker database: Modification of type designations of FAZ series circuit breakers according to Moeller requirements Switching capacity of NZM1,2,3,4 circuit breakers for 690 V added Update of PKZ motor starter database - change in the PKZM0 switching capacity, new PKZM01 series of

motor starters Cable database:

The more accurate R0 values (active resistance, zero-sequence network) for some cables having the cross-section of 35...300 sq. mm result in more accurate calculation of asymmetric short circuits.

Corrections:

Change when entering voltage systems – the phase voltage is entered at first and only then the delta voltage Change in the text of the network identification above the title block - the phase voltage is indicated at first and

only then the delta voltage. No program error in case there are more than 5 components between two nodes (i.e. more than the maximum

quantity allowed). After clicking on “Current-carrying capacity” in the dialogue panel appearing during cable properties editing,

the correct value of the current-carrying capacity is displayed with respect to the laying also when a certain laying is selected being out of the range defined by the standard and when there are more parallel branches used (such as 2 parallel branches of 240 sq. mm cable with B2 laying method).

More accurate calculation of voltage drops. More accurate calculation of 1-ph short circuits in 1-ph IT networks supplied from a 1-ph isolation transformer.

6. Version 2.3.05, June 2005 General Information:

In principle, version 2.3 does not differ substantially from version 2.2. The main asset, besides the update of the databases, is the improved concept of cascades and the option to transfer objects among projects by means of the clipboard.

User interface:

As a new feature, the new installation program with a more convenient user interface also performs the automatic setting of the *.SPI file association with the SPIDER program, and automatically creates an icon on the desktop.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


New functions Cut to Clipboard, Copy to Clipboard, and Paste from the Clipboard have been added, which make it possible to transfer objects either among simultaneously opened projects or within the framework of a project (objects are either components that form a wiring diagram or free graphics). The Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V standard keyboard shortcuts are available.

The new function Tags makes it possible to change component tags in bulk. An automatic feature has been added that serves to display the release parameter settings in the component

wiring diagram for components with adjustable releases. The release parameter settings are also included in the lists of components which comprise the component parameters.

The release parameter setting is transferred from the wiring diagram into the ‘Tripping Characteristics’ module and back.

Identification of the release parameters has been changed: formerly, identification of the parameters according to NZM 7,10,14 circuit-breakers (Ir, tr, Irm, Irmv, tv) was used; in the new version, identification of parameters according to the catalogue for NZM 1-4 and IZM circuit-breakers is used (Ir, tr, Ii, Isd, tsd).

The position in the database tree and in the data table is saved for each database (for example: after inserting a cable from the database, we insert a circuit-breaker; afterwards, when we open the cable database, the same branch of the database tree and the same data table component will be selected as in the previous utilization).

Representation of results after the computation of voltage drops in networks with 1-ph outgoers has been improved.

Improved selection of rectangles by means of the ‘Window’ type selection window. New functions and computation possibilities:

Innovated assessment of the short-circuit current strength of protective devices that are connected to the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component. As a new feature, it is assumed that the short circuit, which the protective component at the outgoer has to withstand, can occur not only at the end of the line protected by this protective component, but also immediately behind the circuit-breaker. So, in the new version, the breaking capacity of a component is assessed with respect to the short-circuit current of the node to which the protective component is connected (the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component). This solution improves the margin of safety and complies with the procedures that are used in important projects (industry, high-rise buildings, health service, etc.). It allows the user to evaluate the computation results more easily.

Improved concept of cascades: The new function ‘Cascades’ makes it possible to define the incoming protective components (at the incomers) and the outgoing protective components (at the outgoers) for each node formed by the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component. The breaking capacities of the outgoing protective components are assessed with respect to the incoming components (the limitation of the short-circuit current by means of a fuse, as well as the interoperation of the circuit-breakers are taken into account).

As a new feature, the circuit-breaker / circuit-breaker cascades are evaluated for NZM.1(2)-A and PL7 (FAZ) pairs.

Tripping characteristics: The feature of simulation of the I2t ON/OFF function has been added for circuit-breakers with an electronic release; for circuit-breakers with a digital release, the computation has been improved for the S-curve with the I4t switched on.

Databases:

The option to use enclosed busbar distribution systems in the same way as in version 2.1 has been restored: there is the option to insert a ‘Line – Busbar System’ component. The database contains the general standard types of enclosed busbar distribution systems; the database can be complemented by the user.

Update of the database of circuit-breakers: Adaptation of the database structure The new series of PL6 modular circuit-breakers has been added (this series has replaced the CLS6 series). The new series of PFL6 overcurrent protection residual current devices has been added (this series has

replaced the CKN6 series). Update of the tripping characteristics of PL7-D and PLHT-C circuit-breakers Update of the breaking capacities of PKZ motor starters Update and complementation of the database of FAZN, FAZ and AZ modular circuit-breakers: Update of the assortment – new current ranges have been added. Update of the tripping characteristics Types with S, K and Z characteristics have been newly included.

Update and complementation of the database of PMC 1,2,3,4 and NZM 1,2,3,4 power circuit-breakers: New current ranges have been added.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Update of breaking capacities Update of the release setting range The tr OFF changeover switch (thermal release switch-off) for -ME and -VE releases has been added. The I2t ON/OFF changeover switch has been added for the -VE release.

Update of the database of IZM power circuit-breakers:

Update of the release setting range

The L-curve (the overcurrent release; alternatives: I2t, I4t, tr OFF) and the S-curve (the short-circuit release; alternatives I2t ON/OFF) are set separately for -U and -D releases.

The maximum setting of the release parameter Ii ≤ 0.8 · Ics for -D releases is tested.

The maximum setting of the release parameters Isd and tsd is tested in such a way that Isd ≤ 0.8 · Icw holds true for -D releases.

NZM14 circuit-breakers have been removed because the production has been terminated.

Update of the database of switch disconnectors:

Adaptation of the database structure

New current ranges have been added for the ZP-A series.

The new series of IS modular switch disconnectors has been added (this series has replaced the Z-SE series).

New current ranges have been added for the PSC power switch-disconnector series.

P14 and NZM14 switch disconnectors have been removed because the production has been terminated.

Update of the database of fuses:

Adaptation of the database structure

Update of the assortment of blade-contact NH fuses with the gG characteristic according to the new documentation (change in the assortment, change of the tripping and let-through current characteristics)

Blade-contact NH fuses with the gF characteristic have been added. Printing, export:

A new option to print and export the table of cables When printing or exporting the lists, you can turn off the indication of the complete file path.

Backward compatibility:

Backward compatibility with the previous versions has been retained (starting from version 2.0). For older projects, it is recommended that the PKZ, NZM 1...4, and IZM series circuit-breakers should be

inserted again (update of the breaking capacities and of the settings of the releases). For older projects, it is recommended that the PL7 and FAZ circuit-breakers should be inserted again

(complementing of the data for correct assessment of the circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker cascades). It is recommended that the types of circuit-breakers, switch-disconnectors and fuses that are not in production

any more should be replaced with new types.

7. Version 2.4.05, July 2006 General: In principle, version 2.4 does not differ from version 2.3. Practically, only the database was updated.

Calculations: Improved calculation of voltage drops in networks with one-phase outlets – the current in the N conductor is

shown. Database: PLI circuit breakers added (modular circuit breakers 10kA with spring terminals on the outgoing side). The support of NZM7,10,14 series circuit breakers was terminated. These circuit breakers can no longer be

inserted into new projects. When opening a project from a previous version, the user is asked to replace the NZM7,10,14 series circuit breakers with currently supplied circuit breakers of NZM1,2,3,4 series.

The no longer supplied circuit breakers NZMB2-A125 and NZMN2-A125 were removed. The no longer supplied circuit breakers NZMB1-M.. and NZMN1-M.. for rated currents of 20-32 A were

removed.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The no longer supplied NZM..-S circuit breakers (circuit breakers without overload release) were removed. The no longer supplied NZML... circuit breakers (breaking capacity of 150kA) were removed. Correction of the assigned release parameters for circuit breakers IZMN2-A*. The support for P7,10; NZM7,10 switch-disconnectors was terminated. High voltage (HV) fuses and their tripping characteristics converted to the LV side were added. HV fuses cannot

be inserted into network projects, they can only be used in the 'Tripping Characteristics' module and are intended only for the purpose of assessing the protection selectivity on the HV and LV side (settings of the circuit breaker release on the LV side).

Demo: A new demo was added, presenting various solutions of parallel cables.

Corrections: Correction of the incorrect calculation of voltage drop on the branch directly behind the transformer and the

incorrect value of the node voltage at the transformer (the voltage drops at the nodes and the voltage drops at other branches remain unchanged).

Correction of a mistake: if a non-defined circuit breaker was included in a project (a circuit breaker inserted using the “Group...” function, for which the parameters were not defined), it was not possible to open such saved project again.

The breaking capacity of 1-phase connected protection devices is checked for 1-phase short circuit only.

8. Version 2.5.06, July 2007 General: In principle, version 2.5 does not differ from version 2.4. Practically, only the database was updated.

User interface: New function Find - searching and zooming any item from wiring diagram according to its tag. This function

improves orientation in large a complicated projects. Calculations: Coordination between protective device and cable by comparing cable time-current heating characteristic and

protective device tripping characteristic can be switched off (this test is not strictly required by IEC standard). Database: LZM power circuit breakers were added; no longer supplied PMC circuit breakers were removed. LN power switch disconnectors were added; no longer supplied PSC switch disconnectors were removed. NZM..-S circuit breakers (circuit breakers without overload release) were added. NZM..-A300 circuit breakers were added. Cables according to standard IEC were added. Generators by Caterpillar manufacturer were updated. Compensation condensers by Frako manufacturer were added.

Corrections: Corrected “idle alarm” invoked by incorrect assignment of protective device to cable after inserting part of wiring

diagram from clipboard by Paste function.

9. Version 2.6.01, July 2008 In general: Version 2.6 is, in principle, no different from the previous versions. Only the database has been updated, and the

changes implied by the updated standard IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007) have been reflected. Calculations: When calculating the fault disconnection time from the power source, the calculated impedance is multiplied by a

safety coefficient of 1.5 in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007). The default value of the limit fault disconnection time from the power source for newly inserted protective devices

is set to 0.4s. This value is required for terminal circuits up to 32A in TN systems pursuant to IEC 60364-4-41 (HD 60364-4-41:2007). The option allowing the user to change this value is retained (e.g. allowing its increase up to 5s for distribution circuits).

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


For user-defined cables, the value defined by the user is used for the rated current of the cable laid in air at 30°, instead of the value calculated pursuant to the standards based on the conductor material and the insulation. This gives the possibility to design own, user-defined cables, with higher current-carrying capacity. The user is responsible for the correctness of the entered values.

Database: Harmonisation of breaking capacities for modular devices:

EN/INT: For devices of PLS*, PLN*, PLHT, FAZ-PN, PKN* series protecting home and similar installations, the breaking capacity Icn=Icu=Ics is defined in accordance with EN 60898;

EN/CZ, EN/RU, EN/BA: For devices of PL6, PL7, PLHT, FAZ-PN, PFL6 and PFL7 series protecting home and similar installations, the breaking capacity Icn=Icu=Ics is defined in accordance with EN 60898;

EN/RO: For devices of CLS*, PLS*, PLN*, FAZ-PN, CKN* and PKN* series protecting building and similar installations, the breaking capacity Icn=Icu=Ics is defined in accordance with EN 60898;

For FAZ, AZ circuit breakers to protect industrial installations, the breaking capacity Icu, Ics is defined in accordance with EN 60947-2;

NZM circuit breakers: NZMB2-A125, NZMN2-A125 circuit breakers added; NZM3-A circuit breakers added (for circuit protection, with thermo-magnetic release); NZM3-S circuit breakers added (for motor protection, without overload release); 4-pole circuit breakers added for all design versions; EN/INT, EN/RO: New possibilities of making cascades were added. As a new feature, the circuit-breaker /

circuit-breaker cascades are evaluated for NZMB(N)(H)1(2)-A + PLHT-B(C)(D) and NZMB(N)(H)1(2)-A + PKNM-B(C) pairs.

EN/INT, EN/RO: Values of limit short circuit current for cascades NZMB(N)(H)1(2) and PLSM-B(C) were corrected.

EN/CZ, EN/RU, EN/BA: New possibilities of making cascades were added. As a new feature, the circuit-breaker / circuit-breaker cascades are evaluated for NZMB(N)(H)1(2)-A + PLHT-B(C)(D) and NZMB(N)(H)1(2)-A + PFL7-B(C) pairs.

EN/CZ, EN/RU, EN/BA: Values of limit short circuit current for cascades NZMB(N)(H)1(2) and PL7-B(C) were corrected.

N1, PN1 switch-disconnectors – texts in the database tree corrected. EN/INT: LZM power circuit breakers added for all design versions.

10. Version 2.7.02, July 2009 In general: Version 2.7 brings, in addition to an improved user interface and enhanced automatic dimensioning, new

calculation possibilities allowing you to apply simultaneous factors and use the software for radial networks. The changes are aimed at making the software easier to use for beginners and occasional users. The algorithms were optimised in order to increase the calculation speed, which will be highly appreciated, in particular, by experienced users dealing with more complex projects.

User interface: Redesigned Group function:

Modified icon in the main menu; the icon was visually accentuated with white background (optically attracts the user as the first important function).

Modified dialogue panel; the groups are selected based on images, and no longer based on text. Current groups improved and new groups added; a simple demo example can now be drawn in 3 clicks only

(separate components such as network, transformer, circuit-breaker, line, etc. do no longer have to be used for standard simple situations).

Entering parameters for high voltage supply network: Icons added in the dialogue panel, accompanied with help that will show comments related to the entered

values of the short-circuit power. A new dialogue panel added – a table with a list of typical cases with high voltage supply networks, indicating

a typical short-circuit power value. The table was compiled based on the recommendations of the power distributor.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A new Calculation dialogue panel: Modified icon in the main menu; the icon was visually accentuated with white background (optically attracts

the user as the second important function). Modified dialogue panel; calculations grouped as follows:

Basic calculations (for most users), All calculations (the same structure as until now; for experienced users), Parameter settings (for experienced users).

A graphical logo added to each calculation for easier orientation. The dialogue panel size and position can be adjusted and remain retained also after the software is closed.

A new Calculation results dialogue panel: Once the calculation is completed, the results of all checks are displayed in a single dialogue panel; the user

needs fewer clicks to obtain the result. The dialogue panel size and position can be adjusted and remain retained also after the software is closed.

The Database window size and position are saved, including the partition position. Tripping characteristics:

The position of the window with selected tripping characteristics to be edited is saved. The position of the window with the circuit-breaker release settings is saved when handling the tripping

characteristics (the dialogues no longer overlap the diagram area). The window with the circuit-breaker release settings contains an Apply button, allowing the user to draw the

tripping characteristics curve based on the current parameter values, without having to leave the dialogue panel.

Possibility to insert a protective device also when the characteristics of the cable assigned to it are already displayed; it is useful for cables protected from both sides when there is, on one side, only a short-circuit protecting fuse and, on the other side, an overload circuit-breaker.

If the comparison of the circuit-breaker tripping characteristics and the cable time-current heating characteristics is disabled, the display of the cable heating characteristics is not offered at all.

Improved Preview dialogue window: the width of the text column changes automatically when the dimensions change.

Possibility to open the last edited files through the list in the File drop-down menu (similarly to other applications such as Word, Excel, ...).

Additional keys added for frequently called functions. Calculations: Possibility to define utilization factor Ku:

Can be defined for loads (motor, general load); The factor is taken into account in both radial and meshed networks; Example for motor application: 7.5kW motor fitted in the project, with maximum 80% load during ordinary

operation – utilization factor Ku=0.8; Example for general load application: general load constituted by a socket circuit composed of 10 sockets,

with 16A each – the nominal current is In=10x16=160A; however, the simultaneous consumption is max. 10% only – utilization factor Ku=0.1.

Possibility to define simultaneous factor Ks: Can be defined for nodes where the network line splits (Switchboard trunk component); Defines the simultaneousness of consumptions from the node (ratio between the number of devices in

operation and the total number of devices); Example: there are 3 outlets connected to a node = 3 loads with a nominal current of: 100A, 500A, 1000A, and

a simultaneous factor was defined as Ks=0.5; the current flowing to the node is 0.5x(100+500+1000) = 800A; Taken into account only with radial networks; Not taken into account with meshed networks.

A new calculation algorithm for voltage drops and load distribution: For radial networks – significantly higher calculation speed; Respects the simultaneous factors Ks; Automatic detection of radial network; automatic application of the new algorithm; The original algorithm is used for meshed networks, using admittance matrix; Ks ignored; Possibility to use the original algorithm also for radial networks is retained.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Redesigned AutoDimensioning algorithm in order to extend the possibilities for its use, in particular, for beginners: AutoDimensioning switch can be enabled by default for all new components inserted in the wiring diagram.

As standard, the AutoDimensioning switch is disabled by default. This default setting can be modified in the Options.

Possibility to AutoDimension both 1-phase and 3-phase circuits simultaneously in one project: Number of wires for cables / busbars is determined automatically based on the phases connected. Number of poles of protective devices is determined semi-automatically based on the phases connected and

taken into account the pre-selection in the Options. Possibility to AutoDimension simultaneously:

Cu / Al, PVC / XLPE cables; Cu / Al busbars, air insulated / sandwich design; The required conductor material and insulation can be defined for every component after its insertion in the

diagram, or the pre-selection from the Options is used. Modular as well as power circuit-breakers, fuses and switch-disconnectors are assigned based on the position

of the device in the diagram. The product series preference is determined in the Options (in case of equivalence, the higher ranking types are preferred, such as NZM are preferred to LZM; PL7 are preferred to PL6, ...).

Lines with transformer / generator are dimensioned based on the transformer / generator. Other lines are dimensioned based on the loads entered.

Check added for power supplies (transformers, generators): Overload check added. Overload protection check added. Components on the transformer line must be dimensioned for the nominal current of the transformer. A button added in the transformer definition dialogue panel to calculate the nominal current of the transformer. Elimination of voltage drops on the transformer; the transformer always works as an ideal device and the

voltage on the secondary terminals is always equal to the nominal voltage of the network regardless of its load. Solving situations when the cable is protected from both sides:

Only short-circuit protection is provided on one side (typically with a fuse). Overload protection is provided on the other side (typically a circuit-breaker used also as main switch). Both protected devices are now considered, and an error message is displayed only if overload protection is

not secured by either device. However, both devices continue to be considered when the fault tripping time from power source is calculated

because – unlike overload – short-circuit can also occur along the cable. Solving situations when there is a switch-disconnector and a protective component on one line: The switch-

disconnector is checked for sufficient pre-protection. The contribution of motors is ignored when 1-phase short-circuit is calculated (in case of a 3-phase short-circuit,

the contribution of motors is applied in the same manner as in previous versions). Variables listed by the software were renamed – all variables are now based on English words. Variables are not

translated to national languages. New Selectivity function to evaluate the selectivity of circuit-breakers based on circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker

selectivity tables specified in the catalogue; two versions are available: Selectivity (comparison of both circuit-breakers selected from the database): Two devices can be selected from

the database independently on the switching diagram edited (no drawings necessary). Selectivity will then be showed based on the selectivity tables, accompanied by the relevant comments.

Selectivity (comparison of circuit-breakers in the project): A cascade must be defined for every network node. The table gives a selectivity evaluation between the incoming and the outgoing circuit-breaker based on the selectivity tables, accompanied by general comments. The table can be printed.

System changes: Updater implemented – automatic check and download of software updates from the Moeller website. Possibility to restore the default position of floating windows (suitable e.g. when an external screen is

disconnected from laptop). Name adjustment of the EXE application shown in Windows. Names of root directory files were modified (in order to make the orientation easier when preparing other

language versions).

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Code page settings corrected for when the wiring diagram is exported to DXF in the Russian version. The Cyrillic alphabet is now correctly displayed in all AutoCAD language versions.

Database: Minor changes in the product range of Moeller power circuit-breakers:

NZMH1-M40 …100 types were added (for motor protection; breaking capacity Icu=100kA) EN/RO, EN/INT version: Extended cascading possibilities for circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker where the LZM-

series incoming circuit-breaker serves as back-up protection of the outgoing circuit-breaker.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Part III: xSpider - Solved Examples

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25. xSpider - Solved Examples _______________________________________________ The examples below demonstrate the basic principles of working with xSpider. It is presumed that the program has been successfully installed by the user and is fully operational. The basic elementary knowledge of operations with applications running under Windows (working with the mouse, operations with files etc.) as well as fundamental orientation in the issues concerning low-voltage network dimensioning is also presumed. The instructions refer to the relevant chapters from the xSpider, Reference Manual where you can find a more detailed explanation.

25.1 Wiring diagram - creation, editing In this case we will show how a new network wiring diagram (network topology) is created and how the basic tools for working with graphics are used. In the end we will carry out a quick check of the designed network (the calculation issues are covered with more detail in the next example). The entire assignment is solved in the DEMO-Network.SPI file. You will need approximately 2.0 hour of time to complete the task. Assignment: design an industrial building power supply in xSpider. Draw the network topology and check the used components for suitability.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Parameters of the particular components are specified as follows: NET1 high-voltage suply network 22 kV, Sk’’=500MVA TR1 SGB oil transformer, 22/0.4 kV, Sr=250kVA, Pk=4.1kW, uk=4% W1 line between the transformer and the main distribution board for the technology

cable 1-CYKY 3x240+120, 5m, 1 parallel branch, installed in air (E) FA1 400A main protection, Moeller brand circuit breaker, Icu=50kA, NZM series, selective with

electronic release TECH1 Technology 1 supply, Pn=40 kW, cosPhi=0.9, 100% utilization (Ku=1) W2 Feed line to technology 1

cable 1-CYKY 4x25, 50m, 1 parallel branch, installed on wall (C) FA2 Technology 1 protection

80A protection, Moeller brand circuit breaker, Icu=25kA, NZM series, circuit protection with thermomagnetic release

TECH2 Technology 2 supply, Pn=80 kW, cosPhi =0.9, 100% utilization (Ku=1) W3 Feed line to technology 1

cable 1-CYKY 3x70+50, 120m, 1 parallel branch, installed on wall (C) FA3 Technology 1 protection

160A protection, Moeller brand circuit breaker, Icu=25kA, NZM series, circuit protection with thermomagnetic release, overload release set to 85 % (Ir=136A)

M1 Power supply for the pumping station technology, motor Pn=30 kW, 100% utilization (Ku=1) W4 Feed line to the pumping station

cable CYKY 4x16, 30m, 1 parallel branch, installed in ground (D) FA4 Protection for the pumping station technology

63A protection, Moeller brand circuit breaker, Icu=25kA, NZM series, for motor protection, with thermomagnetic release, overload release set to 90 % (Ir=56A)

Program launch and initialization of a new project

1. Launch the xSpider program (see Chap. 9.2). 2. The Tip of the Day window appears after startup. Please read the Tip for this

startup and close the window by clicking on the Close button. The pop-up of this window at startup can be overridden, therefore, the window might not be shown. For more details see Chap. 22.1.

3. A new project with default settings is activated automatically at startup. The activation of a new project at the program startup can be disabled. If no network is activated (only the gray main screen is displayed (see Chap. 10.1)), activate one by clicking on the New Project icon (see Chap. 20.3).

4. Set the drawing area - A4 format (see Chap. 18.4). The A4 format is probably set already since it is the most frequent case and this format is in standard set as default for new projects. Let’s take a look at the setting procedure; this step may be skipped if an identical case is repeated:

Select the Page Setup item from the File drop-down menu.

In the subsequently opened dialogue panel, select the A4 format from the group of standard formats.

Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The drawing area appearance will be adjusted according to the selected format.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


5. Set the network type and the voltage system (see Chap. 11.1). In this case we have a TN 400/230 V network. This network is probably set already since it is the most frequently solved case and this type is in standard set as default for new projects. Let’s take a look at the setting procedure; this step may be skipped if an identical case is repeated:

Select the time Network: type, voltage system from the Tools drop-down menu.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you set the TN network type (by its selection from the offered options) and the 400/230 V voltage system (by its selection from the offered options):

Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The selected network type will appear above the title block.

6. Save the new created project to a data file (see Chap. 20.1).

Click on the Save icon.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the information about your project (see Chap. 17). The entered data will be written in the title block (description field) and will be used for project identification. Fill in the particular items e.g. as follows:

Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK.

Another dialogue panel will open - the standard Save dialogue panel as you are familiar with it from other programs (for a detailed description see Chap. 20.1), in which you enter the directory (folder) and the file name where the project is to be saved (e.g. the DOCUMENTS directory and EXAMPLE0.SPI file name). Your screen should look as follows:

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Drawing a network topology

1. First of all, insert the supply group (supply network, transformer, main protection).

Click on the Group icon (see Chap. 11.14). Select the Power supply tab. Select the group “Power supply from high-voltage supply network, transformer connected with

a cable” (click on the image, the name of the group will be displayed below the image). Note the image: the group includes all the necessary components. The violet crosshair indicates the position of the group insertion point.

Click Insert.

The mouse pointer will change. The pointer form determines the position of the symbol with respect to the insertion point (the symbol is directed downwards under the insertion point).

Click the left mouse button to determine the position of the group insertion point in the graphics area of the project window (in the middle of the upper part of the drawing area). The group is drawn.

Click the right mouse button to exit the group insertion mode.

2. In the previous step, you have inserted the tags only; now you must add the electrical parameters of the individual components according to the assignment specified in the beginning.

Double click on the Network component (see Chap. 11.2) with the NET1 tag. A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the values required according to the assignment. Click OK to close the dialogue panel:

Clicked group insertion point.

22 kV high-voltage supply network.

3-phase connection

Short-circuit power of the supply network is part of the entry. Click on the question-mark icon to view a table with typical values for different cases of power supply networks. If you lack other data, you can use some of the values offered. Exact data can be requested from the power distribution company.

Component tag, default value was left.

The short-circuit current is calculated automatically.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Double click on the Transformer component (see Chap. 11.4) with the TR1 tag. You are required to enter a standard transformer manufactured by SGB, therefore you can use the database of components supplied with the program.

Click on the Database button. The database explorer is activated, in this case the transformer database (see Chap. 16.1). Roll down the “SGB Transformers“ branch (by clicking on the „+“ sign or by double clicking on the branch), „Oil transformers“, „22kV“ and click on the „22/0.400 kV“. In the data table, select the type „DOT 250/20 (10)

(22/0.4kV)“, Sr=250 kVA and click Insert.

All transformer parameters will be entered. Click on the button Nominal current ??. A dialogue panel will open, in which the

transformer nominal current Intr=361A will be indicated. Remember this value – you will need it when dimensioning the cable and entering the circuit-breaker settings.


Double click on the Cable component (see Chap. 11.7) with the W1 tag.

Enter the cable length - here 5 meters.

Click on the Define installation button. A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the method of installation „(E) Multi-core cables in air“; set the number of additional circuits in the grouping to 0 (the cable is led separately), ambient temperature - here 30 °C, the user coefficient will not be applied - value 1. Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK.

Set: connected phases: 3-phase connection, the maximum voltage drop in this line is 5% (see Chap. 4.1) - should the voltage drop exceeds this value, the item will be marked as an error component.

You are required to enter a standard CYKY cable, therefore you can use the database of components supplied with the program.

Click on the Database button. The database explorer is activated, in this case the cable database (see Chap. 16.1). Roll down the „Copper (Cu) conductors“ (by clicking on the „+“ sign or by double clicking on the branch), „CYKY type“ and click on the „4 wires (L1

Short-circuit power for 1-phase short circuit does not have to be specified with the necessary HV network (if not known), calculation of asymmetric short circuits will be less

Definition of the network by means of impedances – not used here because the short-circuit power is known.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


L2 L3 PEN)“ branch. In the data table select the „1-CYKY 3x240+120“ type (as you can see from the following columns of the data table, the cross-section of the phase conductor is 240 mm2, the cross-section of the PEN conductor is 120 mm2, the rated current for cables laid in air (E, F) is 430 A) and click Insert.

All line parameters will be entered.

Note: a cable of this cross-section must be used to connect the transformer, although the consumption of the currently connected loads will be lower (only 247A). Components on the transformer line must be dimensioned according to the transformer nominal current (Intr=361A) for if the switchgear would be expanded in the future and the transformer would be used at full power.


Double click on the Circuit-breaker component (see Chap. 11.9) with the FA1 tag.

Set the connected phases: 3-phase connection; 5 s as the maximum disconnection time (see Chap. 3.7); Operating state „On“.

We want to insert a standard Moeller NZM-series, selective circuit-breaker with electronic release, so we will use the component database supplied with the software.

Note: It is recommended to use selective circuit-breakers with electronic release to protect transformer, due to the simple manner of securing selectivity with the outgoing circuit-breakers of the particular outlets. In case of a fault at an outlet, only the circuit-breaker closest to the fault point will trip, while the rest of the installation remains in operation. For more details see Chap. 4.4 and 14.4.2.

Click on the Database button. The database explorer is activated, in this case the circuit-breaker database (see Chap. 16.1). Roll down the “Power circuit-breakers NZM 1,2,3,4 series (up to 1600A)” branch (by clicking on the “+” sign or by double clicking on the branch), “Protection of circuits, generators; selective (-VE)”, “Nominal current In=Iu=250-630A (NZM3-series)”, and click on the “Icu=50kA (415V)” branch. In the data table select the “NZMN3-VE400” type and click Insert.

All circuit-breaker parameters will be entered. Click on the Releases tab. Adjust the thermal release setting Ir to 90% (Ir=360A). This

is necessary in order to ensure overload protection of the transformer (transformer Sr=250kVA, nominal current Intr=361A).


3. Zoom in the upper half of the drawing area by means of the Zoom Window function to make the texts more legible:

Click on the Zoom Window icon (see Chap. 13.4).

Click with your mouse in the left part of the drawing area. Drag a rectangle defining the area to be zoomed in. The rectangle must cover in full the picture drawn. Click the upper right corner of the window. The area will be zoomed in.

If you failed in performing this operation correctly, you can return to the previous image by means of the Zoom Previous function (see Chap. 13.5) or - in case of several unsuccessful attempts in a row - you can use the Zoom All function to view the drawing area in full (see Chap. 13.6). Repeat the Zoom Window function until you obtain the required display.

Zoom

Window

Zoom

Previous

Zoom All

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Insert the branch representing the power supply for technology 1:

Click on the Group icon (see Chap. 11.14). Click on the Outlets tab. Select the “General outlet with circuit-breaker” group.

Click Insert.

With you left mouse button, click the position of the group insertion point on the trunk/busbar (blue horizontal line close to the left margin). The group is drawn.

End the group insertion by clicking the right mouse button.

If the insertion was not successful, the group is not connected to the trunk – use Undo and repeat the procedure.

5. Adjust the image to make the entire diagram drawn clearly visible:

Click on the Zoom Realtime icon (see Chap. 13.3).

The standard mouse pointer (usually an arrow) is changed to the Zoom Realtime pointer (arrow up/down). Click to the image with your mouse, hold the left button down

Component type.

Group insertion point.

Tag identifying the component in the wiring diagram; the automatically offered options were left for these components.

Conductor type, line length and code of the installation method (here it is E – installation in air).

3-phase circuit identification.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


and move the mouse slowly. When moving upwards, the image is enlarged (zoomed in); when moving downwards it is reduced (zoomed out). Some texts are not drawn during the move. Note: on slower computers, the movement can be jerky or the graphics might not move at all. In such case use the Zoom Window function to enlarge the image (see Chap. 13.4) and the Zoom All function to reduce the image (see Chap. 13.6).

Press Esc to exit the function.

Click on the Pan icon (see Chap. 13.2).

The standard mouse pointer (usually an arrow) is changed to the pan pointer (arrows up/down, left/right). Click to the image with your mouse, hold the left button down and move the mouse slowly. The graphics is dragged simultaneously with the mouse move. Some texts are not drawn during the move. Note: on slower computers and with complicated and large diagrams, the movement can be jerky or the graphics might not move at all. In such case use the scroll bars at the side of the graphics area.

Press Esc to exit the function.

Tip: the pan function can be also activated by pressing the middle mouse button (the scroll wheel).

6. Enter the electrical parameters of the branch components:

Double click on the Circuit-breaker component (see Chap. 11.9) with the FA2 tag. Select the Moeller circuit breaker of „NZMB1-A80“ type from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above.

Double click on the Cable component (see Chap. 11.7) with the W2 tag. Enter the cable length - here 50 meters. Through the Define installation button, set the method of installation „(C) Single-core or multi-core cables on a wall“; number of additional circuits in the grouping is 0, ambient temperature of 30 °C, the user coefficient 1. Connected phases: 3-phase connection, the maximum voltage drop in this line is 5%. Select the „1-CYKY 4x25“ type cable from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above.

Double click on the Load component (see Chap. 11.12) with the LOAD1 tag.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the values required according to the assignment. Click OK to close the dialogue panel:

Component tag can be modified as required.

The voltage must correspond tothe selected voltage system.

3-phase connection.

You specify the rated power consumption, the current is calculated automatically.

The maximum voltage drop in the load in relation to the power source voltage. Should the voltage drop exceed this value, the component will be marked as error.

We presume that the load will be permanently running at 100% - utilization factor Ku=1.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


7. Since the branch representing the power supply for technology 2 has very similar parameters, you can copy the branch created previously.

Click on the Copy icon (see Chap. 12.3).

Select the components of the copied branch. Use the cross-wise selection window: click with your left mouse button in the image so that the selection window is on the right near the FA2 circuit breaker, however, it may not interfere in the text (point B1 in the image). If you move the mouse to the left from the clicked point, the selection window is dragged crosswise (all objects lying within the window and all objects partially reaching into the window will be selected). Click the opposite corner of the selection window to the left from the TECH1 motor (point B2). The selected components will be highlighted.

If you select a different component by mistake, press Esc to abort the function and activate Regen from the View drop-down menu to regenerate the image (see Chap. 13.1) and then use the Copy function again.

If the named components are selected, right click on your mouse to exit the selection mode.

Click the first point of the shift vector (the point behind which you are going to „carry“ the copied objects) - the upper end of the FA2 circuit breaker (point B3).

Click the other point of the shift vector (where the objects should be copied) - on the busbar to the left from the end of the FA1 circuit breaker, however, not directly underneath it (point B4).

Click the right mouse button to exit the copying mode.

9. Adjust the electrical parameters of the copied branch (note that the tags were automatically adjusted during the copying in order to avoid any duplicities):

Double click on the Circuit-breaker component (see Chap. 11.9) with the FA3 tag. Select the Moeller circuit breaker of „NZMB2-A160“ type from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above. Go to the Releases tab and set the „Overload release“ to 85% (Ir =136A).

Double click on the Cable component (see Chap. 11.7) with the W3 tag. Adjust the cable length - here 120 meters. Select the „1-CYKY 3x70+50“ type cable from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Double click on the Load component (see Chap. 11.12) with the TECH2 tag. Adjust the rated input to 80 kW.

10. Insert the motor branch representing the pumping station technology.

Click on the Group icon (see Chap. 11.14). Click on the Outlets tab. Select the “Motor outlet with circuit-breaker”.

Click Insert.

With you left mouse button, click the position of the group insertion point on the trunk/busbar (blue horizontal line close to the right margin). The group is drawn.

Click the right mouse button to exit the group insertion mode. If the insertion was not successful, the group is not connected to the trunk or it is

too close to the previously inserted components – use Undo and repeat the procedure.

11. Adjust the electrical parameters of the newly inserted branch:

Double click on the Circuit-breaker component (see Chap. 11.9) with the FA4 tag. Select the Moeller circuit breaker for motor protection of „NZMB1-M63“ type from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above. Go to the Releases tab and set the „Overload release“ to 90% (Ir =56.7A).

Double click on the Cable component (see Chap. 11.7) with the W2 tag. Enter the cable length - here 30 meters. Through the Define installation button, set the method of installation „(D) Single-core or multi-core cables directly in ground without additional protection“; number of additional circuits in the grouping is 0, ambient temperature of 20 °C, the user coefficient 1. Connected phases: 3-phase connection, the maximum voltage drop in the line is 5%. Select the „CYKY 4x16“ type cable from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above.

Double click on the Motor component (see Chap. 11.12) with the M1 tag. Select the standard 30 kW motor from the database in the manner you are already familiar with from above. Utilization factor Ku=1; we presume that the motor will be permanently running at full power.

12. Save the performed changes to a data file - click on the Save icon.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Performing check calculations

1. Prior to commencing with the calculations, it is suitable to check the connection logic (whether all network components are interconnected and whether the rules for building wiring diagrams are complied with.

Click on the Calculation icon (see Chap. 14.2).

A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the ”Check connection logic“ item from the ”Basic calculations” group; click OK to close the dialogue panel.

The connection logic will be checked; an error message will be displayed if any fault is identified. In such case, the best thing you can do is delete the bad part (the Erase function, see Chap. 12.5) and insert the components again by repeating the respective part of these instructions. If everything is OK, the following dialogue panel appears:

2. Now carry out a complex check of the entire network. This check includes:

calculation of voltage droops and load distribution together with the subsequent check of the network dimensioning for the rated state and overload protection of cables,

calculation of the 3-phase symmetric short circuit in all network nodes one by one, together with the subsequent check of short-circuit protection (whether the network components withstand the maximum short-circuit current),

calculation of the 1-phase asymmetric short circuit in all network nodes one by one, together with the subsequent check of the disconnection time of the fault point from the power source (whether the protective devices respond sufficiently to the minimum short-circuit current),

Click on the Calculation icon.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the “Complex check of the entire

network” item from the ”Basic calculations” group; click OK to close the dialogue panel.

When the calculation is completed, a dialogue panel appears showing the results of the check. To close the dialogue panel, press Esc or click on the Continue icon.

Before the short-circuit computations are carried out, you will be asked about the definition of cascades, that is, about the determination of the incoming protective component at the incomer and of the outgoing components at the outgoer (see Chap. 14.4.1).

Since there is only a single node in our example and this is a radial network, cascades will be set automatically.

Close the dialogue by pressing Esc or by clicking on the Continue icon.

It is obvious that all checks comply. 3. If you want to view and print the results of the particular calculations, you must perform

every single calculation separately (see Chap. 14.3, 14.4) and then print the wiring scheme

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


with the calculation results (see Chap. 18.3), or the table - the list of network components with the calculation results (see Chap. 18.2). This issue is covered in detail in the following example, see Chap. 25.2.

4. Save the performed changes to a data file - click on the Save icon. 5. The example is completed. Close the xSpider program by clicking on the X in the

upper right corner of the program window.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.2 Wiring diagram editing and basic calculations - radial network In this example we are going to show the method of building a network wiring diagram by combining the particular components together and performing the basic calculations (voltage drops and load distribution, short-circuit calculations). The initial point is the demo example in file DEMO-RadialNetwork.SPI, which is included in the xSpider standard installation. A new outlet will be inserted into the already designed radial network, and the basic calculations will be carried out. Subsequently, the network component parameters will be adjusted in order to comply with the requirements. You will need approximately 2 hour of time to complete the task.

1. Launch the xSpider program (see Chap. 9.2). 2. Open the file DEMO-RadialNetwork.SPI with the demo example project.

Use the function Open Demo (see Chap. 20.2.1). This file contains an already designed simple radial network. We will demonstrate the basic operations in the program through a modification of this example. You should see the following drawing:

3. Use the Save As function from the File drop-down menu (see Chap. 20.1) to save the file to a different directory under a different file name (such as in the DOCUMENTS directory, file name EXAMPLE1.SPI). This is essential in order to retain the original, intact initial state of the demo example so that it is possible to refer to it again at a later point in time, if necessary.

4. By means of the Zoom Window function (see Chap. 13.4) enlarge the image of the bottom Rv2 busbar with the connected branches.

Activate the Zoom Window function.

Click to the bottom left corner above the title block. Drag a rectangle defining the area to be zoomed in. The rectangle must include the entire Rv2 bus - blue horizontal line. Click the upper right corner of the window. Your screen should look approximately as follows:

Zoom

Window

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


If you failed in performing this operation correctly, you can return to the previous image by means of the Zoom Previous function (see Chap. 13.5) or - in case of several unsuccessful attempts in a row - you can use the Zoom All function to view the drawing area in full (see Chap. 13.6). Repeat the Zoom Window function until you obtain the required display.

5. Now erase all components comprising the M4-1f motor outlet (all the way to the

right).

Activate the Erase function (see Chap. 12.5).

Select components marked with M4-1f, CAB10, FA10 tags. Use the cross-wise selection window: click with your left mouse button so that the selection window is on the right near the FA1 circuit breaker, however, it may not interfere in the text (point B1). If you move the mouse to the left from the clicked point, the selection window is dragged crosswise (all objects lying within the window and all objects partially reaching into the window will be selected). Click the opposite corner of the selection window to the left from the M4-1f motor (point B2). The selected components will be highlighted.

If you select a different component by mistake, press Esc to abort the function and activate Regen to regenerate the image (see Chap. 13.1) and then use the Erase function again.

If the named components are selected, right click on your mouse to exit the selection of components. The selected components will be erased.

Zoom

Previous

Zoom All

Erase

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Your screen should look approximately as follows:

6. Now you should create a new motor outlet connected via the Rv2 bus, comprising a standard

asynchronous 3-phase motor of 7.5 kW. 7. First of all, insert the motor.

Activate the Motor function (see Chap. 11.11).

Click with your mouse to define the position of the motor symbol in the wiring diagram (in the bottom right part about at the level of LOAD2). The symbol will go downwards from the clicked point as indicated by the mouse pointer shape.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the motor parameters. The motor is one of the so-called inserted components (for explanation of this term see Chap. 1.2) and all its parameters must be specified.

Motor

The selection of objects to be erased by the cross-wise window. All objects lying within the window and all objects partially reaching to the window will be selected.

First clicked point of the selection window.

Second clicked point of the selection window.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Use a standard motor from the database. Click on the Database button. The database explorer is activated, in this case the motor database (see Chap. 16.1). The database includes standard components and can be modified and expanded by the user (see Chap. 16.2). In the data table, select the „7.5 kW“ motor and click Insert.

All motor parameters will be entered. Utilization factor Ku=1 (we presume that the motor will be permanently running at full power). Click OK to close the dialogue panel - the Motor component will be inserted in the wiring diagram.

8. Now insert the protective device. For the motor outlet, use the PKZM motor starter from

Moeller, in which both the thermal protection as well as the short-circuit protection of the motor are integrated.

Activate the Circuit-breaker function (see Chap. 11.9).

Click with your mouse to define the position of the circuit-breaker symbol in the wiring diagram (on the busbar above the motor symbol). The symbol will go downwards from the clicked point as indicated by the mouse pointer shape.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you enter the circuit-breaker parameters. The circuit breaker is one of the so-called user-defined components (for explanation of this term see Chap. 1.2), its parameters can be, but do not have to be entered depending on the program mode you are using. In this example you use the program in the control mode (for explanation of this term see Chap. 1.2), therefore, the circuit-breaker parameters must be specified. Use the component database again.

Click on the Database button. The database explorer is activated, in this case the circuit-breaker database (see Chap. 16.1). Roll down the „Motor starters, PKZ type“ branch (by clicking on the „+“ sign or by double clicking on the branch), and click on the „PKZM0 type (0.16-32A), rotary knob control“. In the data table, select the type „PKZM0-16“ starter (its current corresponds to the 7.5 kW motor) and click Insert.

All circuit-breaker parameters will be entered. Make sure that the operating state of the circuit breaker is set to „On“. Click OK to close the dialogue panel - the Circuit-breaker component will be inserted in the wiring diagram.

9. Now insert the line connecting the protective device with the motor. Use a standard cable

CYKY 4x1.5. The line length is 50 m and the cable will be laid on cable ladders.

Activate the Line-Cable function (see Chap. 11.7).

Now you must specify the cable path. Click the first point of the cable - you must click precisely at the bottom end of the circuit-breaker symbol in order to ensure a „conductive“ connection.

Click the second cable point - you must click precisely at the top end of the circuit-breaker symbol. If your symbols are not located directly under each other, you must

Circuit-breaker

Cable

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


first click the breakpoint and only then the point at the symbol end. If the drawing doesn’t go well the way it should, press Esc to abort the function and activate Regen to regenerate the image (see Chap. 13.1) and then use the Line-Cable function again.

A dialogue panel will open subsequently, in which you enter the cable parameters. Cable is one of the so-called inserted components and all its parameters must be specified.

Enter the cable length - 50 m.

Use a standard cable from the database. Click on the Database button. The database explorer is activated, in this case the cable database (see Chap. 16.1). The database includes standard components and can be modified and expanded by the user (see Chap. 16.2). Roll down the „Copper (Cu) conductors“, then the „CYKY type“ and click on the „4 wires (L1, L2, L3, PEN)“ branch. In the data table, select the „CYKY 4x1.5“ type cable (as you can see from the following columns of the data table, the cross-section of the phase conductor and the PEN conductor is 1.5 mm2, the rated current for cables laid in air (E, F) is 18.5 A which is sufficient for a 7.5 kW motor in the first approximation) and click Insert. Tip: you can also insert the component by double clicking on the respective item in the data table.

Through the Define installation button, set the method of cable installation - select „(E) Multi-core cables on cable ladder“ (for explanation of the term „installation“ see Chap. 2.2.3); the number of additional circuits in the grouping is 0 (the cable is led separately), ambient temperature of 30 °C, the user coefficient 1 (not applied). Close this dialogue panel by clicking OK.

Click OK to close the next dialogue panel - the Line-cable component will be inserted in the wiring diagram.

10. By means of the Save function (see Chap. 20.1), save the performed changes to a file

on your hard disk in order to have them stored in case of any accident and for future use.

11. The new outlet is now defined. Another outlet of the same or identical parameters can be created by means of the Copy function (see Chap. 12.3) with the subsequent editing of properties for the copy made (see Chap. 12.1).

12. Prior to commencing with the calculations, it is suitable to check the connection logic (whether the new outlet is connected correctly, whether there are no gaps between the components or whether the components do not overlap), see Chap. 14.2. Activate the Calculation function (see Chap. 14). A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the item ”Check the network connection logic” from the ”Basic calculations” group; then click OK

Identification of the 3-phase branch

Cable tag; the automatically assigned value is used here.

Identification of the method of installation according to IEC (see Chap. 2.2.3).

Specified cable length.

Cable type.

Note: the tags CAB1, CAB2, etc. are used for older lines. The W1, W2, etc. line tag is offered as default in the new examples. The component tags can be modified by the user in any way and serve for identification of the respective component in the wiring diagram. Various tags within a project are not in the way of correct program functioning.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


to close the dialogue panel. The connection logic will be checked; an error message will be displayed if any fault is identified. In such case, the best thing you can do is delete the new branch - see step 5 in these instructions, and insert it again by repeating the steps 6 - 10 of these instructions. If everything is OK, the following dialogue panel appears:

13. Now calculate the voltage drops and load distribution (see Chap. 14.3):

Activate the Calculation function (see Chap. 14).

A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the item ”Voltage drops and load distribution” from the ”Basic calculations” group (see Chap. 14.3). When the calculation is completed, the following checks are carried out:

Check of voltage drops in the nodes with respect to power source voltage. Such nodes are not compliant where the voltage drop exceeds the limit set when inserting the component. When inserting the new branch, we used the preset value taken over from the program settings under the Options (5 percent for branches, 10 percent for nodes). Everything complies in our case.

Check of voltage drops in branches. Such branches are not compliant where the voltage drop exceeds the limit set when inserting the component. Everything complies in our case.

Check of circuit breakers and fuses for nominal current. Such devices are not compliant where the current in the branch exceeds the nominal current of the device (switching off takes place at the nominal state already). Here you can see that the FA1 circuit-breaker is not suitable - it would switch off at the rated state already, and the S1 switch-disconnector would be overloaded. Let’s ask ourselves a question: Is it really incorrect this way? Answer: Not necessarily, due to simultaneousness. The loads connected to the Rv2 switchboard trunk might never be activated at the same time. This can be simulated in xSpider by setting the simultaneous factor in node Rv2, or by switching some circuit-breakers off. For more detailed information on simultaneousness, see the theoretical introduction in Chap. 2.1. Here it is apparent that xSpider is not an “automatic designer”; it is only a tool, aid and the designer must correctly interpret the results delivered by the software. Here we thus conclude that the FA1 circuit-breaker is compliant, which can be subsequently verified through simulated operation when some loads are switched off, or through modification of the simultaneous factor in node Rv2 and repeated calculation.

Check of cables for rated current load. Such components are not compliant where the current in the branch exceeds the rated current of the component (determined with respect to its installation, ambient temperature, cable grouping etc). It is a similar situation as in the previous case.

Check of cable overload protection. The nominal current of the protective device must be smaller than the cable current-carrying capacity determined with respect to its installation and ambient temperature (first term from article 433.2 from IEC 60364-4-43). Second term I2≤1.45*Iz from article 433.2 from IEC 60364-4-43 must be

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


completed also. The ampere-second heating characteristic of the cable must lie above the tripping characteristic of the circuit-breaker (this test is not required by IEC 60364-4-43 and can switched off, but this method is more accurate). For more details see the theoretical introduction, Chap. 2.3. The ampere-second characteristics of the cable in relation to the respective protective device can be viewed by means of the Tripping Characteristics module (see Chap. 15). Here you can see that the FA6/CAB6 pair is not compliant - the explanation of reasons follows in the next step.

The list of error components can be printed out - for future needs, to correct the diagram components etc. Drag the partition and the corners to change the dialogue panel size.

To close the dialogue panel, press Esc or click on the Continue icon.

Voltage and drops are displayed in the network nodes and branches, and unsuitable components are highlighted. Because the network includes 1-phase consumption, the values are displayed for the particular phases; this makes the assessment of phase distribution of load easier. By means of the Zoom Window function (see Chap. 13.4), enlarge the diagram segment enough to make the values legible. Try also the Pan function (see Chap. 13.2 and the Zoom function (see Chap. 13.3) and view the entire diagram in full. For interpretation of the values see the end of Chapter 14.3.

14. Print the wiring scheme with the calculation results by means of the Print function (see Chap. 18.3).

Click on the Print icon.

A dialogue panel will open, in which you double click on the item called „Network wiring diagram with calculation results“.

Zoom

Window

Pan

Zoom

List of checks carried out.

List of error components and description of errors.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Another dialogue panel will open, in which you check the connected printer and the paper supplied (A4 format is anticipated as default) and select the „Full drawing area to the selected format“ item. This option will enlarge/reduce the diagram so that the entire diagram including the frame fits to the selected paper format supplied in the printer (usually A4).

Click on Preview - an exhibit of the printout will appear. Click OK to close the preview window.

Click OK - the print itself will be carried out.

15. Now you can view the tripping characteristics for the unsuitable FA6/CAB6 pair.

Activate the module of Tripping characteristics (see Chap. 15).

Draw the characteristics of the FA6/CAB6 pair (see Chap. 15.4).

Activate the function Insert component/cable from network project.

A list will open subsequently, in which you double click on the line with the FA6/CAB6 pair.

The circuit-breaker tripping characteristic will be blue (close the dialogue panel by clicking OK without changing anything).

The ampere-second heating characteristic of the cable will be green for instance. Click on the Color button and select the color from the color range. Click OK to close the dialogue panels.

Click Close to close the dialogue panel with the list of network components.

You can see that the characteristics for the cable and the circuit-breaker are touching each other - the IEC requirement for cable overload protection is not complied with - for more details see Chap. 2.3.

16. Now modify the cable CAB6 so that the standard requirement for cable overload protection is

met - a larger cable cross-section must be selected.

Use the Exit function from the File menu or click on the X in the upper right corner of the window to close the window of the „Tripping Characteristics“ module (see Chap. 15.8.5).

The tripping characteristic of the circuit-breaker.

Time/current temperature-rise characteristic of the cable.

The characteristics of the cable and of the circuit-breaker intersect – the requirement stipulated by the IEC standard forthe protection of the cable against overload has not been met.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Adjust the image so that you can clearly see the outlet containing the CAB6 cable (functions Zoom All, then Zoom Window and Pan, as the case may be).

Double click on the CAB6 cable - thus activating the mode for properties editing (see Chap. 12.1). A dialogue panel will appear in the form identical to the one shown when inserting the cable.

Click on the Database button and select the „CYKY 4x10“ cable from the data table (see Chap. 16.1), thus strengthening the cable by 2 grades.

Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The calculation results disappear - they would not correspond to the new network configuration anymore.

Repeat step 15 - now you can see that there is a sufficient distance between the characteristics, the IEC standard requirement for cable overload protection is complied with.

Close the window of the „Tripping Characteristics“ module.

Repeat step 13 - calculation of voltage drops: the error concerning the insufficient protection of FA6/CAB6 does not occur anymore.

17. By means of the Save function (see Chap. 20.1), save the performed changes to a file on your hard disk in order to have them stored in case of any accident and for future use.

18. Now calculate the 3-phase short circuit:

Activate the Calculation function (see Chap. 14). A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the item ”Short-circuit currents: 3-

phase symmetric short-circuit Ik3p” from the ”All calculations” group.

Select the node where the short circuit is to occur, i.e. the M4 node in this case.

Now, you are asked about the definition of cascades, that is, about the determination of the incoming protective component at the incomer and of the outgoing components at the outgoer for each node that is formed by the ‘Switchboard Trunk’ component (see Chap. 14.4.1). In the demonstrational example, the cascades are already set: for the Rv1 node, the FA8 is the incoming circuit-breaker (a circuit-breaker at the incomer), the other ones are of the outgoing type (at the outgoers). The breaking capacities of the outgoing circuit-breakers will be assessed with respect to the incoming circuit-breaker. For the Rv2 node, the incoming component can not be defined (there is a switch disconnector at the incomer).

Close the window by pressing the Esc key or by clicking on the Continue icon.

The computation will be carried out, and a chart will be displayed of the time behaviour of the short-circuit current. It is apparent that the first half-wave of the short-circuit current does not exceed the rest too much – so, the peak short-circuit current will not be too high and the situation will quickly stabilize. Close the window with the chart by clicking on the small cross at the right corner or by pressing the Esc key. Note: The

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


option to display the window with the chart may have been switched off in the program settings; in that case, the chart will not be displayed (switching on the option – see Chap. 21.4).

Checks of the particular network components follow:

Check of circuit breakers and fuses for breaking capacity. Such devices are not compliant for which the breaking short-circuit current in the branch exceeds the breaking capacity of the component. The breaking capacity of the device is determined by the Ics or Icu value in case of circuit breakers - depending on the setting of the „Dimension for …“ switch (see Chap. 11.7), or by the Icn value in case of fuses. Everything complies in our case.

Check of switch-disconnectors for nominal current load. The switch disconnector will not disconnect the short circuit, but must be able to withstand the short-circuit current in the short term. Such devices are not compliant where the effective heating current in the branch per 1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(1s) of the component.

Check of cables/busbars for short-circuit current load. Such devices are not compliant where the effective heating current in the branch per 0.1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(0.1s) of the component. For more details see the theoretical introduction, Chap. 3.6. Everything complies in our case.

The values for Ik’’ and Ikm are displayed in the node

where the short circuit occurred; the Ik’’ current is calculated as it „flows“ through the entire network (for explanation of meaning of the variables see Chap. 3.2). By means of the Zoom Window function (see Chap. 13.4), enlarge the diagram segment enough to make the values legible. Try also the Pan function (see Chap. 13.2 and the Zoom function (see Chap. 13.3) and view the entire diagram in full. Note that the program takes the contributions from motors into account.

18. Repeat the previous item and bring about a short circuit in node Rv1 – in this case, the FA3 circuit-breaker does not conform to the condition, while the other ones do conform. Why? How do we assess the breaking capacities of the circuit-breakers in the cascade?

All the components connected to this node must withstand this short-circuit current (that is, a short circuit immediately behind the component, not only at the end of the protected line).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


19. Induce a short circuit in the NET1 node and repeat the previous step. Note the short-circuit

current waveform - the surge short-circuit current is significant here. 20. Now calculate the 1-phase short circuit:

Activate the Calculation function (see Chap. 14). A dialogue panel will open, in which you select the item ”Short-circuit currents: 1-phase

short-circuit Ik1p” from the ”All calculations” group.

Select the node where the short circuit is to occur, i.e. the M4 node in this case.

Now, you are asked about the definition of the cascades – the cascades were already set in the previous step. So, only close the dialogue by pressing the Esc key or by clicking on the Continue icon.

When the computation has been carried out, the checks of the individual components of the network follow:

Check of circuit breakers and fuses for breaking capacity. Everything complies in our case, which is logical since the 3-phase short circuit complied and the short-circuit current for the 1-phase short circuit will always be lower

Check of switch-disconnectors for nominal current load. The switch disconnector will not disconnect the short circuit, but must be able to withstand the short-circuit current in the short term. Such devices are not compliant where the effective heating current in the branch per 1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(1s) of the component.

Protection against dangerous voltage in non-conductive parts (check for the failure disconnection time from source). It is carried out for 1-phase short circuits only. Such component, which is the closest to the short-circuit point, is not compliant for which the disconnection time exceeds the limit set when inserting the component. When inserting

If it is not possible that the outgoing protective component might interoperate with the incoming one, it is always assessed separately, without regard to the setting of the cascades (in this case, the FA2 and FA3 motor starters).

The FA8 incoming circuit-breaker serves as a backup protection of the outgoing circuit-breakers at node Rv1.

If the outgoing protective component might interoperate with the incoming protective component, a check is carried out to establish whether the anticipated cut-off short-circuit current is not greater than the limit specified by the manufacturer for the given pair. The fact that the circuit-breaker is assessed as a cascade is indicated by an information message.

The FA3 motor starter must be replaced with a different one, one with a higher breaking capacity, e.g. PKZM4-16.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


the new branch, we used the preset value taken over from the program settings under the Options (0.4s). You can see that the new inserted branch is not suitable. Therefore, you must use a cable with larger cross-section to reduce the impedance of the fault loop.

Check of cables/busbars for short-circuit current load. The cable in the new branch is not compliant (the short-circuit current will flow through the conductor for a relatively long time and, during that period of time, the conductor will be overheated).

Check of the PEN conductor for short-circuit current load. It is carried out only for 1-phase short circuits in case the PEN conductor cross-section is smaller than the phase-conductor cross-section. Such devices are not compliant where the effective heating current in the branch per 0.1 s exceeds the short-time withstand current Icw(0.1s) of the PEN cable conductor.

To close the dialogue panel, press Esc or click on the Continue icon.

21. Now modify the cable W10 so that the standard requirement for disconnection time of the failure point from the power source is met - a larger cable cross-section must be selected.

Adjust the image so that you can clearly see the outlet containing the W10.

Double click on the W10 cable - thus activating the mode for properties editing (see Chap. 12.1). A dialogue panel will appear in the form identical to the one shown when inserting the cable.

Click on the Database button and select the „CYKY 4x4“ cable from the data table (see Chap. 16.1), thus strengthening the cable by 2 grades.

Close the dialogue panel by clicking OK. The calculation results disappear - they would not correspond to the new network configuration anymore.

Repeat the previous step - calculation of the 1-phase short circuit in the M4 node: the error in the disconnection time test does not occur anymore; disconnection will take place within 0.0108s, which means that the cable could possibly be unnecessarily oversized.

Print the wiring scheme with the calculation results by means of the Print function (see Chap. 18.3).

Now repeat the check for the 3-phase short circuit (the short-circuit current increases due to the enlarged cable cross-section) - everything is OK.

Print the wiring scheme with the calculation results by means of the Print function (see Chap. 18.3). You can also print the list of network components with their parameters or with the calculation results (see Chap. 18.1, 18.2).

22. By means of the Save function (see Chap. 20.1), save the performed changes to a file on your hard disk in order to have them stored in case of any accident and for future use.

23. The example is completed. Close the xSpider program by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the program window.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3 Overview of demo examples provided with the program Files with the demo examples are located in the ...\xSpider\DEMO directory. They are intended as a presentation of the program possibilities, on one hand, and for inspiration and as an initial point to help you solve your specific problems, on the other hand. In order to load a demo file in the program, use the Open Demo function (see Chap. 20.2.1). In the next step, use the Save As function from the File drop-down menu (see Chap. 20.1) to save the example to a different directory under a different file name (such as in the DOCUMENTS directory, file name EXAMPLE-x.SPI). This is essential in order to retain the original, intact initial state of the demo example so that it is possible to refer to it again at a later point in time, if necessary. During the program upgrade, the demo examples are usually updated as well, therefore, the original files can be replaced with new ones.

Note: examples taken over from the older program version use the line tags CAB1, CAB2, etc. The W1, W2, etc. line tag is usually offered as default in the new examples. The component tags can be modified by the user in any way and serve for identification of the respective component in the wiring diagram. Various tags within a project are not in the way of correct program functioning.

25.3.1 DEMO-RadialNetwork File: DEMO-RadialNetwork.SPI. An example of a simple radial network supplied from a low-voltage network. The initial situation in the example is not debugged on purpose in order to provide an opportunity to demonstrate some error states. This example is used as the initial point in Chap. 25.2.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.2 DEMO-MeshedNetwork

File: DEMO-MeshedNetwork.SPI. An example of a simple meshed network supplied from two independent high-voltage network power sources. The initial situation in the example is not debugged on purpose in order to provide an opportunity to demonstrate some error states.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.3 DEMO-Simultaneous-and-Utilization-Factors File: DEMO-Simultaneous-and-Utilization-Factors.SPI. An example of a simple radial network, explaining the application of the simultaneous factor (in a network node) and the utilization factor (for loads).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.4 DEMO-Busbar

File: DEMO-Busbar.SPI. An example of how the supply of machines in an industrial facility can be solved by means of a busbar distribution, when the branches to the individual machines are protected separately in fuse boxes, but the „backbone-distribution“ segments between the boxes are not protected. The aim is to verify the protection of the individual branches.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.5 DEMO-LoadLooping

File: DEMO-LoadLooping.SPI. An example of how the so-called load looping can be solved: A backbone cable run is led and the branches to the individual facilities are led out from the fuse boxes. The backbone cable run segments between the junction boxes are not protected. The aim is to verify the voltage drops and the protection of the individual branches.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.6 DEMO-Cascade File: DEMO-Cascade.SPI. An example of how you can solve a circuit-breaker/fuse cascade (backup protection of the circuit breaker) and limitation of the short-circuit current through a fuse.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


File: DEMO-Cascade-CBreak-CBreak.SPI. An example of a circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker cascade solution.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.7 DEMO-Network File: DEMO-Network.SPI. An example of a simple radial network - supply of an industrial building with motor load. The approach applied to create this example is described step by step in Chapter 25.1.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.8. DEMO-Network-1F File: DEMO-Network-1F.SPI. An example of radial network with one-phase consumptions. After calculating the voltage drops and load distribution (see Chap. 14.3), the load of every individual phase is determined (current in the phase, voltage drop), which allows you to assess the load distribution in phases.

25.3.9. DEMO-Network-TN690 File: DEMO-Network-TN690.SPI. An example of how a simple meshed TN network can be solved with the 690 V voltage level (such as network in a welding shop). The impact of the voltage system on the breaking capacity of the circuit breakers is demonstrated (see Chap. 11.9).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


25.3.10 DEMO-Network-IT File: DEMO-Network-IT.SPI. An example of a simple IT network representing the isolated medical system (ZIS) for instance. Supply is provided from the TN supply network, the impedances in the connection point are specified (as obtain by calculation for the TN supply network in a separate project - see Chap. 14.5). The correct method of connecting an isolation transformer is demonstrated.

25.3.11 DEMO-ParallelCables File: DEMO-ParallelCables.SPI. An example demonstrating various methods of connection and simulation of parallel cable branches (every branch has its own separate protection, all parallel branches are protected with one common protection device).

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


Notes:

xSpider manual

Documents

Transcript of xSpider manual